Samsung | SL-M2870FW | Samsung 흑백 레이저복합기 28ppm SL-M2870FW 사용자 매뉴얼

User’s Guide
BASIC
BASIC
This guide provides information concerning installation, basic operation and
troubleshooting on Windows.
ADVANCED
This guide provides information about installation, advanced configuration, operation and
troubleshooting on various OS environments.
Some features may not be available depending on models or countries.
M267x series
M287x series
M288x series
BASIC
1. Introduction
3. Maintenance
Key benefits
5
Ordering supplies and accessories
71
Features by model
7
Available supplies
72
Useful to know
13
Available maintenance parts
73
About this user’s guide
14
Storing the toner cartridge
74
Safety information
15
Redistributing toner
76
Machine overview
21
Replacing the toner cartridge
79
Control panel overview
24
Replacing the imaging unit
82
Turning on the machine
28
Monitoring the supplies life
84
Installing the driver locally
29
Setting the toner low alert
85
Reinstalling the driver
31
Cleaning the machine
86
Tips for moving & storing your machine
93
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
4. Troubleshooting
Menu overview
33
Machine’s basic settings
37
Tips for avoiding paper jams
95
Media and tray
39
Clearing original document jams
96
Basic printing
54
Clearing paper jams
99
Basic copying
60
Understanding the status LED
107
Basic scanning
65
Understanding display messages
110
Basic faxing
66
2
BASIC
5. Appendix
Specifications
116
Regulatory information
126
Copyright
139
3
1. Introduction
This chapter provides information you need to know before using the machine.
• Key benefits
5
• Features by model
7
• Useful to know
13
• About this user’s guide
14
• Safety information
15
• Machine overview
21
• Control panel overview
24
• Turning on the machine
28
• Installing the driver locally
29
• Reinstalling the driver
31
Key benefits
Environmentally friendly
Fast high resolution printing
• To save toner and paper, this machine supports Eco feature.
• You can print with a resolution of up to 4,800 x 600 dpi effective (600 x 600
x 3 bit) output.
• To save paper, you can print multiple pages on one single sheet of paper
(see "Using advanced print features" on page 232).
• To save paper, you can print on both sides of the paper (double-sided
printing) (see "Using advanced print features" on page 232).
• To save electricity, this machine automatically conserves electricity by
substantially reducing power consumption when not in use.
• Fast, on-demand printing.
M267x series:
- For single-side printing, up to 26 ppm (A4) or up to 27 ppm (Letter).
M287x/M288x series:
- For single-side printing, up to 28 ppm (A4) or up to 29 ppm (Letter).
• We recommend using recycled paper for saving energy.
Convenience
• Simply touch your mobile device on the NFC tag on your printer and get the
print job done (see "Using the NFC feature" on page 197).
• You can print on the go from your smartphone or computer using Google
Cloud Print™ enabled apps (see "Google Cloud Print™" on page 205).
• Easy Capture Manager allows you to easily edit and print whatever you
captured using the Print Screen key on the keyboard (see "Easy Capture
Manager" on page 263).
Key benefits
• Samsung Easy Printer Manager and Printing Status is a program that
monitors and informs you of the machine’s status and allows you to
customize the machine’s settings (see "Using Samsung Printer Status" on
page 273or "Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager" on page 270).
• Print posters: The text and pictures of each page of your document are
magnified and printed across the multiple sheets of paper and can then be
taped together to form a poster (see "Using advanced print features" on
page 232).
• Samsung Easy Document Creator is an application to help users scan,
compile, and save documents in multiple formats, including .epub format.
These documents can be shared via social networking sites or fax (see
"Using Samsung Easy Document Creator" on page 269).
• You can print in various operating systems (see "System requirements" on
page 121).
• AnyWeb Print helps you screen-capture, preview, scrap, and print the
screen of Windows Internet Explorer more easily than when you use the
ordinary program (see "Samsung AnyWeb Print" on page 264).
Supports various wireless network setting method
• Your machine is equipped with a USB interface and/or a network interface.
• Smart Update allows you to check for the latest software and install the
latest version during the printer driver installation process. This is available
only for Windows.
• If you have Internet access, you can get help, support application, machine
drivers, manuals, and order information from the Samsung website,
www.samsung.com > find your product > Support or Downloads.
Wide range of functionality and application support
• Using the WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup™) button
- You can easily connect to a wireless network using the WPS button on
the machine and the access point (a wireless router).
• Using the USB cable or a network cable
- You can connect and set various wireless network settings using a USB
cable or a network cable.
• Using the Wi-Fi Direct
• Supports various paper sizes (see "Print media specifications" on page 118).
• Print watermark: You can customize your documents with words, such as
“Confidential” (see "Using advanced print features" on page 232).
- You can conveniently print from your mobile device using the Wi-Fi or
Wi-Fi Direct feature.
See "Introducing wireless set up methods" on page 166.
Features by model
Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on model or country.
Operating System
Operating System
M267x series
M287x series
M288x series
Windows
●
●
Mac
●
●
Linux
●
●
●
Unix
(●: Included, Blank: Not available)
Software
You can install the printer driver and software when you insert the software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
For Windows, select the printer driver and software in the Select Software to Install window.
Software
SPL printer drivera
PCL printer driver
PS printer drivera
M267x series
●
M287x series
M288x series
●
●
Features by model
Software
M267x series
M287x series
M288x series
●
●
Scan to PC settings
●
●
Fax to PC settings
●
●
(M267xF/M267xFN/M267xFH/M267xHN only)
(M287xFD/M287xFW/M287xHN/M288xFW/
M288xHW only)
●
●
Samsung Printer Status
●
●
Samsung AnyWeb Printb
●
●
Samsung Easy Document Creator
●
●
Easy Capture Manager
●
●
SyncThru™ Web Service
●
●
XPS printer driverb
Direct Printing Utilityb
Samsung Easy Printer
Manager
Device settings
(M267xN/M267xFN/M267xHN only)
SyncThru Admin Web Service
●
●
(M267xN/M267xFN/M267xHN only)
Easy Eco Driver
●
●
Easy Capture Manager
●
●
Features by model
Software
Fax
Scan
M267x series
M287x series
M288x series
●
●
(M267xF/M267xFN/ M267xFH/ M267xHN
only)
(M287xFD/M287xFW/M287xHN/M288xFW/
M288xHW only)
Twain scan driver
●
●
WIA scan driver
●
●
Samsung Network PC Fax
a. Depending on the operating system you use, the installed printer driver may differ.
b. Download the software from the Samsung website and install it: (http://www.samsung.com > find your product > Support or Download). Before installing, check whether your
computer’s OS support the software.
(●: Included, Blank: Not available)
Features by model
Variety feature
Features
M267x series
M287x series
M288x series
Hi-Speed USB 2.0
●
●
Network Interface Ethernet 10/100 Base TX
wired LAN
●
●
(M267xN/M267xFN/M267xHN only)
●
Network Interface 802.11b/g/n wireless LANa
(M287xDW/M287xFW/M288xFW/M288xHW only)
●
NFC (Near Field Communication)
(M288xFW/M288xHW only)
●
Google Cloud Print™
●
(M267xN/M267xFN/M267xHN only)
●
AirPrint
●
(M267xN/M267xFN/M267xHN only)
●
Eco printing
●
Duplex (2-sided) printing
Duplex (2-sided) printing (manual)bc
Document Feeder
Automatic Document
Feeder (ADF)
●
●
●
●
Features by model
Features
Handset
Fax
Multi Send
Delay Send
Priority Send
Forward to Fax
Secure Receive
Scan
Scan to PC
M267x series
M287x series
M288x series
●
●
(M267xFH/M267x HN only)
(M287x HN/M288xHW only)
●
●
(M267xF/M267xFN/M267xFH/ M267xHN only)
(M287xFD/M287xFW/M287xHN/M288xFW/
M288xHW only)
●
●
(M267xF/M267xFN/M267xFH/ M267xHN only)
(M287xFD/M287xFW/M287xHN/M288xFW/
M288xHW only)
●
●
(M267xF/M267xFN/M267xFH/ M267xHN only)
(M287xFD/M287xFW/M287xHN/M288xFW/
M288xHW only)
●
●
(M267xF/M267xFN/M267xFH/ M267xHN only)
(M287xFD/M287xFW/M287xHN/M288xFW/
M288xHW only)
●
●
(M267xF/M267xFN/M267xFH/ M267xHN only)
(M287xFD/M287xFW/M287xHN/M288xFW/
M288xHW only)
●
●
Features by model
Features
Copy
M267x series
M287x series
M288x series
●
Duplex
Reduce/Enlarge
●
●
Collation
●
●
2-up/ 4-up
●
●
Adjust background
●
●
a. Depending on your country, wireless LAN card may not be available. For some countries, only 802.11 b/g can be applied. Contact your local Samsung dealer or the retailer where you
bought your machine.
b. Available for Windows OS only.
c. Only tray 1 is supported.
(●: Included, Blank: Not available)
Useful to know
The machine does not print.
A paper jam has occurred.
• Open the print queue list and remove the document from the
list (see "Canceling a print job" on page 56).
• Open and close the front door.
• Remove the driver and install it again (see "Installing the driver
locally" on page 29).
• Check the instructions on removing jammed paper in this
manual and troubleshoot accordingly (see "Clearing paper
jams" on page 99).
• Select your machine as your default machine in your Windows.
Printouts are blurry.
Where can I purchase accessories or supplies?
• Inquire at a Samsung distributor or your retailer.
• Visit www.samsung.com/supplies. Select your country/region
to view product service information.
• The toner level might be low or uneven. Shake the toner
cartridge.
• Try a different print resolution setting.
• Replace the toner cartridge.
The status LED flashes or remains constantly on.
Where can I download the machine’s driver?
• Turn the product off and on again.
• Visit www.samsung.com to download the latest machine’s
driver, and install it on your system.
• Check the meanings of LED indications in this manual and
troubleshoot accordingly (see "Understanding the status LED"
on page 107).
About this user’s guide
This user's guide provides information for your basic understanding of the
machine as well as detailed steps to explain machine usage.
•
Do not discard this manual, and keep it for future reference.
•
Read the safety information before using the machine.
•
If you have a problem using the machine, refer to the troubleshooting
chapter.
•
Terms used in this user’s guide are explained in the glossary chapter.
•
All illustrations in this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending
on its options or model you purchased.
•
The screenshots in this user’s guide may differ from your machine
depending on the machine’s firmware/driver version.
•
The procedures in this user’s guide are mainly based on Windows 7.
2
General icons
Icon
Text
Description
Caution
Gives users information to protect the machine from
possible mechanical damage or malfunction.
Warning
Used to alert users to the possibility of personal injury.
Note
Provides additional information or detailed
specification of the machine function and feature.
1
Conventions
Some terms in this guide are used interchangeably, as below:
•
Document is synonymous with original.
•
Paper is synonymous with media, or print media.
•
Machine refers to printer or MFP.
1. Introduction
14
Safety information
These warnings and precautions are included to prevent injury to you and
others, and to prevent any potential damage to your machine. Be sure to read
and understand all of these instructions before using the machine. After reading
this section, keep it in a safe place for future reference.
4
Operating environment
Warning
3
Important safety symbols
Do not use if the power cord is damaged or if the electrical outlet is
not grounded.
Explanation of all icons and signs used in this chapter
Warning
Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in severe
personal injury or death.
Caution
Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in minor
personal injury or property damage.
Do not attempt.
This could result in electric shock or fire.
Do not place anything on top of the machine (water, small metal or
heavy objects, candles, lit cigarettes, etc.).
This could result in electric shock or fire.
• If the machine gets overheated, it releases smoke, makes
strange noises, or generates an odd odor, immediately turn off
the power switch and unplug the machine.
• The user should be able to access the power outlet in case of
emergencies that might require the user to pull the plug out.
This could result in electric shock or fire.
Do not bend, or place heavy objects on the power cord.
Stepping on or allowing the power cord to be crushed by a heavy
object could result in electric shock or fire.
Do not remove the plug by pulling on the cord; do not handle the
plug with wet hands.
This could result in electric shock or fire.
1. Introduction
15
Safety information
5
Caution
During an electrical storm or for a period of non-operation,
remove the power plug from the electrical outlet.
Operating method
Caution
This could result in electric shock or fire.
Be careful, the paper output area is hot.
Do not forcefully pull the paper out during printing.
Burns could occur.
It can cause damage to the machine.
If the machine has been dropped, or if the cabinet appears
damaged, unplug the machine from all interface connections and
request assistance from qualified service personnel.
Be careful not to put your hand between the machine and paper
tray.
Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire.
You may get injured.
If the machine does not operate properly after these instructions
have been followed, unplug the machine from all interface
connections and request assistance from qualified service
personnel.
Be care when replacing paper or removing jammed paper.
Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire.
If the plug does not easily enter the electrical outlet, do not
attempt to force it in.
Call an electrician to change the electrical outlet, or this could
result in electric shock.
Do not allow pets to chew on the AC power, telephone or PC
interface cords.
New paper has sharp edges and can cause painful cuts.
When printing large quantities, the bottom part of the paper
output area may get hot. Do not allow children to touch.
Burns can occur.
When removing jammed paper, do not use tweezers or sharp metal
objects.
It can damage the machine.
Do not allow too many papers to stack up in the paper output tray.
It can damage the machine.
This could result in electric shock or fire and/or injury to your pet.
1. Introduction
16
Safety information
Do not block or push objects into the ventilation opening.
Caution
This could result in elevated component temperatures which can
cause damage or fire.
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other
than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation
exposure.
This machine's power reception device is the power cord.
To switch off the power supply, remove the power cord from the
electrical outlet.
Before moving the machine, turn the power off and disconnect all
cords. The information below are only suggestions based on the
units weight.
If you have a medical condition that prevents you from lifting, do
not lift the machine. Ask for help, and always use the appropriate
amount of people to lift the device safely.
Then lift the machine:
•
If the machine weighs under 20 kg (44.09 lbs), lift with 1 person.
•
If the machine weighs 20 kg (44.09 lbs) - 40kg (88.18 lbs), lift
with 2 people.
•
If the machine weighs more than 40 kg (88.18 lbs), lift with 4 or
more people.
6
Installation / Moving
Warning
Do not place the machine in an area with dust, humidity, or water
leaks.
This could result in electric shock or fire.
Place the machine in the environment where it meets the
operating temperature and humidity specification.
Otherwise, quality problems can occur and cause damage to the
machine (see "General specifications" on page 116).
The machine could fall, causing injury or machine damage.
Choose a flat surface with enough space for ventilation to place
the machine. Also consider the space required to open the cover
and trays.
The place should be well-ventilated and be far from direct light,
heat, and humidity.
When using the machine for a long period of time or printing a
large number of pages in a non-ventilated space, it could pollute
the air and be harmful to your health. Place the machine in a wellventilated space or open a window to circulate the air periodically.
1. Introduction
17
Safety information
Do not place the machine on an unstable surface.
a. AWG: American Wire Gauge
The machine could fall, causing injury or machine damage.
7
a
Use only No.26 AWG or larger, telephone line cord, if necessary.
Maintenance / Checking
Otherwise, it can cause damage to the machine.
Make sure you plug the power cord into a grounded electrical
outlet.
Caution
Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire.
Use the power cord supplied with your machine for safe
operation. If you are using a cord which is longer than 2 meters (6
feet) with a 110V machine, then the gauge should be 16 AWG or
larger.
Otherwise, it can cause damage to the machine, and could result
in electric shock or fire.
Do not put a cover over the machine or place it in an airtight
location, such as a closet.
If the machine is not well-ventilated, this could result in fire.
Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords.
This can diminish performance, and could result in electric shock
or fire.
The machine should be connected to
the power level which is specified on the label.
Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning the
inside of the machine. Do not clean the machine with benzene,
paint thinner or alcohol; do not spray water directly into the
machine.
This could result in electric shock or fire.
When you are working inside the machine replacing supplies or
cleaning the inside, do not operate the machine.
You could get injured.
Keep cleaning supplies away from children.
Children could get hurt.
Do not disassemble, repair or rebuild the machine by yourself.
It can damage the machine. Call a certified technician when the
machine needs repairing.
If you are unsure and want to check the power level you are using,
contact the electrical utility company.
1. Introduction
18
Safety information
To clean and operate the machine, strictly follow the user's guide
provided with the machine.
Do not burn any of the supplies such as toner cartridge or fuser
unit.
Otherwise, you could damage the machine.
This could cause an explosion or uncontrollable fire.
Keep the power cable and the contact surface of the plug clean
from dust or water.
When storing supplies such as toner cartridges, keep them away
from children.
Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire.
Toner dust can be dangerous if inhaled or ingested.
• Do not remove any covers or guards that are fastened with
screws.
Using recycled supplies, such as toner, can cause damage to the
machine.
• Fuser units should only be repaired by a certified service
technician. Repair by non-certified technicians could result in
fire or electric shock.
In case of damage due to the use of recycled supplies, a service
fee will be charged.
• The machine should only be repaired by a Samsung service
technician.
For supplies that contain toner dust (toner cartridge, waste toner
bottle, imaging unit, etc.) follow the instructions below.
• When disposing of the supplies, follow the instructions for
disposal. Refer to the reseller for disposal instructions.
8
Supply usage
Caution
Do not disassemble the toner cartridge.
Toner dust can be dangerous if inhaled or ingested.
• Do not wash the supplies.
• For a waste toner bottle, do not reuse it after emptying the
bottle.
If you do not follow the instructions above, it may cause machine
malfunction and environmental pollution. The warranty does not
cover damages caused by a user's carelessness.
When toner gets on your clothing, do not use hot water to wash
it.
Hot water sets toner into fabric. Use cold water.
1. Introduction
19
Safety information
When changing the toner cartridge or removing jammed paper,
be careful not to let toner dust touch your body or clothes.
Toner dust can be dangerous if inhaled or ingested.
1. Introduction
20
Machine overview
9
Components
Power cord
Quick installation guide
Software CDa
Handsetb
Misc. accessoriesc
Machine
a. The software CD contains the print drivers and software applications.
b. Handset model only (see "Variety feature" on page 10)
c. Miscellaneous accessories included with your machine may vary by country of purchase and specific model.
1. Introduction
21
Machine overview
10
6
Front view
7
• This illustration may differ from your machine depending on your model.
Paper level indicator
Tray
8
• Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on
model or country (see "Features by model" on page 7).
14
Handseta
15
Paper width guide on a document
feeder
16
NFC tagb (Near Field
Communication)
Manual feeder tray
16
1
2
10
12
13
11
a. Handset model only (see "Variety feature" on page 10).
b. M288x series only.
3
9
4
15
8
5
14
6
7
1
Document feeder cover
9
Output tray
2
Document feeder input tray
10
Output support
3
Document feeder output
support
11
Paper width guide on a manual
feeder
4
Control Panel
12
Scanner lid
5
Front cover
13
Scanner glass
1. Introduction
22
Machine overview
11
3
Rear view
Extension telephone socket
(EXT)c
4
• This illustration may differ from your machine depending on your model.
• Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on
model or country (see "Features by model" on page 7).
2
7
USB port
Rear cover
a. M267xN/M267xFN/M267xHN/M267xHN/M287xND/M287xFD/M287xDW/M287xFW/
M287xHN/M288xFW/M288xHW only.
b. May not be available depending on models or your country.
c. M267xF/M267xFN/M267xHN/M267xHN/M287xFD/M287xFW/M287xHN/M288xFW/
M288xHW only.
3
1
7
6
5
4
1
Network porta
5
Power receptacle
2
Telephone line socket (Line)b
6
Power switchb
1. Introduction
23
Control panel overview
This control panel may differ from your machine depending on its model.
There are various types of control panels.
4
Left/Right Arrows
Scrolls through the options available in the selected
menu and increases or decreases values.
5
Menu
Opens Menu mode and scrolls through the available
menus (see "Accessing the menu" on page 33).
6
OK
Confirms the selection on the screen.
7
Stop/
Clear
Stops an operations at any time.
8
Power/
Wake Up
Turns the power on or off, or wakes up the machine
from the power save mode. If you need to turn the
machine off, press this button for more than three
seconds.
9
Start
Starts a job.
12
M267xN/M287xND/M287xDW
1
2
14
1
13
ID Copy
3
12
4
5
11
6
7
4
10
8
9
Allows you to copy both sides of an ID card like a
driver’s license on a single side of paper (see "ID card
copying" on page 64).
2
Scan to
Switches between scan and copy mode. The Scan to
LED turns on scan mode and turns off on copy mode.
3
Display screen
Shows the current status and displays prompts during
an operation.
10 Power
Saver
Goes into power save mode.
11 Back
Sends you back to the upper menu level.
12 Status LED
Indicates the status of your machine (see
"Understanding the status LED" on page 107).
13 Eco
Turn on Eco mode to reduce toner consumption and
paper usage (see"Eco printing" on page 58).
1. Introduction
24
Control panel overview
13
14
Darkness
WPS
Adjust the brightness level to make a copy for easier
reading, when the original contains faint markings and
dark images.
M267xF/M267xFN/M287xFD/M267xFH/M287xFW/
M267xHN/M287xHN/M288xFW/M288xHW
Configures the wireless network connection easily
without a computer (see "Wireless network setup" on
page 165).
1
2
3
21
20
19
4
5
18
6
7
17
8
9
6
10 11
16
12
13
15
14
1
Darkness
Adjust the brightness level to make a copy for easier
reading, when the original contains faint markings and
dark images.
2
ID Copy
Allows you to copy both sides of an ID card like a
driver’s license on a single side of paper (see "ID card
copying" on page 64).
3
Display screen
Shows the current status and displays prompts during
an operation.
4
Copy
Switches to Copy mode.
5
Fax
Switches to Fax mode.
1. Introduction
25
Control panel overview
6
Left/Right Arrows
Scrolls through the options available in the selected
menu and increases or decreases values.
7
Menu
Opens Menu mode and scrolls through the available
menus.
8
OK
Confirms the selection on the screen.
9
Numeric keypad
Dials a number or enters alphanumeric characters.
10 Address
Book
Allows you to store frequently used fax numbers or
search for stored fax numbers.
11 Redial/
Pause(-)
Redials the last number in ready mode, or inserts a
pause(-) into a fax number in edit mode.
12 Stop/
Clear
Stops an operations at any time.
13 Power/
Wake Up
Turns the power on or off, or wakes up the machine
from the power save mode. If you need to turn the
machine off, press this button for more than three
seconds.
14 Start
Starts a job.
15 Power
Saver
Goes into power save mode.
16 On Hook
Dial
When you press this button, you can hear a dial tone.
Then enter a fax number. It is similar to making a call
using speaker phone.
17 Back
Sends you back to the upper menu level.
18 Scan
Switches to Scan mode.
19 Status LED
Indicates the status of your machine (see
"Understanding the status LED" on page 107).
20 Eco
Turn on Eco mode to reduce toner consumption and
paper usage (see"Eco printing" on page 58).
1. Introduction
26
Control panel overview
21
Press this button and the display will Print Screen? on
the display screen. If you want to print only the active
screen, select the Active. If you want to print the whole
screen, select Full.
• Print Screen can only be used in the
Windows and Mac operating systems.
• You can only use this function with USBconnected machine.
Print Screen
• When printing the active window/whole
monitor screen using the print screen
button, the machine may use more toner
depending on what is being printed.
• You can only use this function if the
machine’s Samsung Easy Printer Manager
program is installed. If you are a Mac OS
user, you need to enable Screen Print
Settings from the Samsung Easy Printer
Manager to use the Print Screen feature.
Reduce/Enlarge
WPS
You can reduce or enlarge the size of a copied image
from 25% to 400% when you copy original documents
from the scanner glass. (see "Reduced or enlarged
copy" on page 63).
Configures the wireless network connection easily
without a computer (see "Wireless network setup" on
page 165).
1. Introduction
27
Turning on the machine
Illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Machine overview" on page 21).
1
Connect the machine to the electricity supply first.
Turn the switch on if the machine has a power switch.
2
1
For M267xN and M287xND/M287xDW, also press the
(Power/Wake Up) button to turn the machine on.
1. Introduction
28
Installing the driver locally
If the installation window does not appear, click Start > All programs >
Accessories > Run.
A locally connected machine is a machine directly attached to your computer
using the cable. If your machine is attached to a network, skip the following
steps below and go on to installing a network connected machine’s driver (see
"Installing driver over the network" on page 153).
X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter, which represents your CDROM drive and click OK.
•
• If you are a Mac, Linux, or Unix OS user, refer to the "Software Installation"
on page 143.
If the installation window does not appear, from Charms, select
Search > Apps and search for Run. Type in X:\Setup.exe, replacing
“X” with the letter that represents your CD-ROM drive and click OK.
• The installation window in this User’s Guide may differ depending on the
machine and interface in use.
If “Tap to choose what happens with this disc.” pop-up window
appears, click the window and select Run Setup.exe.
• Only use a USB cable no longer than 3 meters (118 inches).
14
Windows
1
2
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
For Windows 8,
3
Review and accept the installation agreements in the installation
window. Then, click Next.
4
Select USB connection on the Printer Connection Type screen. Then,
click Next.
5
Follow the instructions in the installation window.
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
You can select the software applications in the Select Software to Install
window.
1. Introduction
29
Installing the driver locally
From the Windows 8 Start Screen
• The V4 driver is automatically downloaded from the Windows Update if
your computer is connected to the Internet. If not, you can manually
download the V4 driver from Samsung website, www.samsung.com >
find your product > Support or downloads.
• You can download Samsung Printer Experience app from the Windows
Store. You need have a Microsoft account to use the Windows Store.
1 From Charms, select Search.
2 Click Store.
3 Search and click Samsung Printer Experience.
4 Click Install.
• If you install the driver using the supplied software CD, V4 driver is not
installed. If you want to use the V4 driver in the Desktop screen, you can
download from the Samsung website, www.samsung.com >find your
product > Support or downloads.
• If you want to install Samsung’s printer management tools, you need to
install them using the supplied software CD.
1
Make sure that your computer is connected to the Internet and powered
on.
2
3
Make sure that the machine is powered on.
Connect the computer and the machine with a USB cable.
The driver is automatically installed from the Windows Update.
1. Introduction
30
Reinstalling the driver
If the printer driver does not work properly, follow the steps below to reinstall
the driver.
4
Insert the software CD into your CD-ROM drive and install the driver
again (see "Installing the driver locally" on page 29).
15
Windows
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
2
From the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Samsung
Printers > Uninstall Samsung Printer Software.
•
For Windows 8,
1 From Charms, select Search > Apps.
From the Windows 8 Start Screen
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
2
Click on the Uninstall Samsung Printer Software tile in the Start
screen.
3
Follow the instructions in the window.
2 Search and click Control Panel.
3 Click Programs and Features.
4 Right-click the driver you want to uninstall and select Uninstall.
3
Follow the instructions in the installation window.
• If you cannot find a Samsung Printer Software tile, unintstall from the
desktop screen mode.
• If you want to uninstall Samsung’s printer management tools, from the
Start screen, right-click the app > Uninstall > right-click the program
you want to delete > Uninstall and follow the instruction in the window.
1. Introduction
31
2. Menu Overview and
Basic Setup
This chapter provides information about the overall menu structure and the basic setup options.
• Menu overview
33
• Machine’s basic settings
37
• Media and tray
39
• Basic printing
55
• Basic copying
61
• Basic scanning
66
• Basic faxing
67
Menu overview
The control panel provides access to various menus to set up the machine or use
the machine’s functions.
6
Press
(Stop/Clear) to return to the ready mode.
• An asterisk (*) appears next to the currently selected menu.
• Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.
• Some menu names may differ from your machine depending on its
options or the models.
• The menus are described in the Advanced Guide (see "Useful Setting
Menus" on page 208).
1
Accessing the menu
1
Select the Fax, Copy, or Scan button on the control panel depending on
the feature to be used.
2
Select
(Menu) until the menu you want appears on the bottom line
of the display and press OK.
3
Press the left/right arrows until the needed menu item appears and press
OK.
4
5
If the setting item has sub menus, repeat step 3.
Press OK to save the selection.
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
33
Menu overview
Fax Featurea (see "Fax Feature" on page 214)
Darkness
Rcv. Forward
Fax Setupa (see "Sending setup" on page 215,
"Receiving setup" on page 216)
DRPD
Sending
Copy Feature (see "Copy feature" on page 211)
Original Size
Photo
Light+5- Light+1
Forward to Fax
Redial Times
Ring to Answer
Reduce/Enlarge
Collation
Normal
Forward to PC
Redial Term
Stamp Rcv Name
Duplexd
Layout
Dark+1- Dark+5
Forward & Print
Prefix Dial
Rcv Start Code
1 Sided
Normal
ECM Mode
Auto Reduction
1->2Sided
2-Up
1->2Sided Rot.
4-Up
Resolution
Secure Receive
Standard
Off
Modem Speed
Discard Size
Fine
On
Fax Confirm.
Junk Fax Setup
Super Fine
Print
Image TCR
DRPD Mode
Light+5- Light+1
Photo Fax
Add Page
Dial Modeb
Duplex Printc
Normal
Off
Color Fax
Cancel Job
Dark+1- Dark+5
Auto
Original Size
Receiving
Receive Mode
Change Default
Darkness
ID Copy
Darkness
Adjust Bkgd.
Original Type
Enhance Lev.1
Multi Send
Fax
Resolution
Text
Enhance Lev.2
Delay Send
Tel
Original Size
Text/Photo
Priority Send
Ans/Fax
Erase Lev.1- Erase
Lev.4
Manual TX/RX
Send Forward
a.
b.
c.
d.
M267xF/ M267xFN/ M287xFD/ M287xFW/ M267xFH/ M267xHN/ M287xHN/M288xFW/M288xHW only.
This option may not be available depending on your country.
M287xFD/M287xFW/ M287xHN/M288xFW/M288xHW only.
M287xND/M287xFD/M287xDW/M287xFW/M287xHN/M288xFW/M288xHW only.
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
34
Menu overview
Copy Setup
(see "Copy Setup" on page 213)
Change Default
Machine Setup
Original Size
Machine IDb
Copies
Fax Numberb
Reduce/Enlarge
Duplexa
Darkness
Usage Counter
Eco Settings
Fax Receivedb
Portrait
Fax Sentb
Landscape
Paper Size
Paper Type
Clock Modeb
Paper Source
Language
Default Mode
Toner Save
Paper Setup
Date & Timeb
Original Type
Collation
Print Setupe
(see "Print menu" on page 210)
System Setup
(see "System setup" on page 217)
Margin
b
Power Save
Sound/Volumeb
Key Sound
Scheduled Jobsb
Fax Confirm.b
Junk Fax
b
Orientation
Duplex
Off
Long Edge
Short Edge
e
PCL Font List
Copies
Address Bookb
Resolution
Auto Power Offc
Alarm Sound
Wakeup Event
Speaker
CLR Empty Msgf
Auto CR
System Timeout
Ringer
Supplies Life
SkipBlankPages
Image Mgr.
Emulation
Job Timeout
Report
Maintenance
Altitude Adj.
Configuration
TonerLowAlert
Auto Continue
Demo Page
ImgU.Low Alertg
Paper Substit.
Network Conf.d
Serial Number
Clear Text
Supplies Info.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
M287xND/ M287xFD/M287xDW/M287xFW/M287xHN/M288xFW/M288xHW only.
M267xF/ M267xFN/ M287xFD/M287xFW/M267xFH/ M267xHN/M287xHN/M288xFW/M288xHW only.
M267xN/ M287xND only.
M267xN/M267xFN/M287xND/ M287xFD/M287xDW/M287xFW/M267xHN/M287xHN/M288xFW/M288xHW only.
M287xND/M287xFD/M287xDW/M287xFW/M287xHN/M288xFW/M288xHW only.
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
35
Menu overview
f. This option only appears when small amount of toner is left in the cartridge.
g. M2675/M2676/M2875/M2876/M2885/M2886 series only.
Network
TCP/IP (IPv4)a
Wirelessb
DHCP
Wi-Fi ON/OFFb
BOOTP
Wi-Fi Directb
Static
TCP/IP (IPv6)a
IPv6 Activate
DHCPv6 Config
Ethernet Speeda
Automatic
a. M267xN/M267xFN/M287xND/M287xFD/M287xDW/M287xFW/M267xHN/M288xFW/
M288xHW only.
b. M287xDW/M287xFW/M288xFW/M288xHW only.
c. M287xFW/M288xFW only.
WPS Settingb
WLAN Settingc
WLAN Defaultb
WLAN Signalb
Protocol Mgr.a
10Mbps Half
Net. Activate
10Mbps Full
Http Activate
100Mbps Half
WINS
100Mbps Full
SNMP V1/V2
UPnP(SSDP)
MDNS
SetIP
SLP
Network Conf.a
Clear Settinga
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
36
Machine’s basic settings
You can set the machine’s settings by using the Device Settings in
Samsung Easy Printer Manager program.
Enter the correct time and date using arrows or numeric keypad (see
"Keypad letters and numbers" on page 226).
• For Windows and Mac users, you set from Samsung Easy Printer
• Month = 01 to 12
• Day = 01 to 31
Manager >
(Switch to advanced mode) > Device Settings, see
"Device Settings" on page 272.
• Year = requires four digits
• Hour = 01 to 12
• Minute = 00 to 59
After installation is complete, you may want to set the machine's default
settings.
•
Clock Mode: You can set your machine to display the current time
using either a 12-hour or 24-hour format.
•
Power Save: When you are not using the machine for a while, use
this feature to save power.
To change the machine’s default settings, follow these steps:
It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for some
models.
1
Select
panel.
2
Select the option you want, then press OK.
When you press the
(Power/Wake Up) button, start printing, or a fax is
received, the product will wake up from the power saving mode.
(Menu) > System Setup > Machine Setup on the control
•
•
Language: change the language that is displayed on the control
panel.
•
Date & Time: When you set the time and date, they are used in delay
fax. They are printed on reports. If, however, they are not correct, you
need to change it for the correct time being.
3
4
Altitude Adj.: Print quality is affected by atmospheric pressure,
which atmospheric pressure is determined by the height of the
machine above sea level. Before you set the altitude value,
determine the altitude where you are (see "Altitude adjustment" on
page 225).
Select the option you want, then press OK.
Press OK to save the selection.
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
37
Machine’s basic settings
5
Press
(Stop/Clear) button to return to ready mode.
Refer to below links to set other settings useful for using the machine.
• See "Entering various characters" on page 226.
• See "Keypad letters and numbers" on page 226.
• See "Setting the paper size and type" on page 50.
• See "Setting up the fax address book" on page 228.
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
38
Media and tray
This chapter provides information on how to load print media into your
machine.
2
•
Brightness: Some print media are whiter than others and produce sharper,
more vibrant images.
•
Surface smoothness: The smoothness of the print media affects how crisp
the printing looks on the paper.
Selecting print media
You can print on a variety of print media, such as plain paper, envelopes, labels,
and transparencies. Always use print media that meet the guidelines for use
with your machine.
• Some print media may meet all of the guidelines in this user’s guide and
still not produce satisfactory results. This may be the result of the sheets
characteristics, improper handling, unacceptable temperature and
humidity levels, or other variables over which cannot be controlled.
• Before purchasing large quantities of print media, ensure that it meets
the requirements specified in this user’s guide.
Guidelines for select the print media
Print media that does not meet the guidelines outlined in this user’s guide may
cause the following problems:
•
Poor print quality
•
Increased paper jams
•
Premature wear on the machine.
Properties, such as weight, composition, grain, and moisture content, are
important factors that affect the machine’s performance and the output quality.
When you choose print materials, consider the following:
•
The type, size, and weight of the print media for your machine are described
in print media specifications (see "Print media specifications" on page 118).
•
Desired outcome: The print media you choose should be appropriate for
your project.
• Using print media that does not meet these specifications may cause
problems or require repairs. Such repairs are not covered by Samsung’s
warranty or service agreements.
• The amount of paper put into the tray may differ according to media
type used (see "Print media specifications" on page 118).
• Make sure not to use the inkjet photo paper with this machine. It could
cause damage to the machine.
• Using flammable print media can cause a fire.
• Use designated print media (see "Print media specifications" on page
118).
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
39
Media and tray
The use of flammable media or foreign materials left in the printer may lead
to overheating of the unit and, in rare cases may cause a fire.
The paper quantity indicator shows the amount of paper in the tray.
The amount of paper put into the tray may differ according to media type used
(see "Print media specifications" on page 118).
3
Tray overview
To change the size, you need to adjust the paper guides.
1
2
1 Full
2 Empty
2
1
3
1 Tray extension guide
2 Paper length guide
3 Paper width guide
If you do not adjust the guide, it may cause paper registration, image skew,
or jamming of the paper.
Paper type available for duplex printing
Duplex printing might not be available for some models (see "Features by
model" on page 7).
Depending on the power voltage your machine uses, available paper types for
duplex printing differs. Refer to the below table.
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
40
Media and tray
Power voltage
Available paper
110V
Letter, Legal, US Folio, Oficio
220V
A4
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
41
Media and tray
4
Loading paper in the tray
When printing using the tray, do not load paper on the manual feeder, it may cause a paper jam.
2
1
2
1
3
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
42
Media and tray
5
Loading in manual feeder
The manual feeder can hold special sizes and types of print material, such as postcards, note cards, and envelopes (see "Print media specifications" on page 118).
Tips on using the manual feeder
• Load only one type, size and weight of print media at time in the manual feeder.
• To prevent paper jams, do not add paper while printing when there is still paper in the manual feeder.
• Print media should be loaded face up with the top edge going into the manual feeder first and be placed in the center of the tray.
• To ensure printing quality and to prevent paper jams, only load the available paper (see "Print media specifications" on page 118).
• Flatten any curl on postcards, envelopes, and labels before loading them into the manual feeder.
• When printing on special media, you must follow the loading guidelines (see "Printing on special media" on page 45).
• When papers overlap when printing using the manual feeder, open tray and remove the papers then try printing again.
• When paper does not feed well while printing, push the paper in manually until it starts feeding automatically.
• When the machine is in a power save mode, the machine does not feed paper from the manual feeder. Wake up the machine by pressing the power button before
using the manual feeder.
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
43
Media and tray
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
44
Media and tray
6
• When using special media, we recommend you feed one sheet at a time
(see "Print media specifications" on page 118).
Printing on special media
The table below shows the special media usable in each tray.
The paper setting in the machine and driver should match to print without a
paper mismatch error.
• Printing the special media (Face up)
If special media are printed out with curl, wrinkles, crease, or black bold
lines, open the rear cover and try printing again. Keep the rear cover
opened during printing.
To change the paper setting set in the machine, from the Samsung Easy Printer
Manager select
(Switch to advanced mode) > Device Settings.
Or if your machine supports a display screen, you can set it using the
(Menu)
button on the control panel.
Then, set the paper type from the Printing preferences window > Paper tab >
Paper Type (see "Opening printing preferences" on page 57).
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
45
Media and tray
To see paper weights for each sheet, refer to "Print media specifications" on
page 118.
Envelope
Printing successfully on envelopes depends upon the quality of the envelopes.
Types
Tray
Manual feeder
Plain
●
●
Thick
●
●
●
Thicker
Thin
●
●
Bond
●
●
●
Color
CardStock
●
●
Labels
●
Transparency
●
Envelope
●
Thick
Envelope
●
Preprinted
●
Cotton
●
Recycled
●
●
Archive
●
●
(●: Included, Blank: Not available)
To print an envelope, place it as shown in the following figure.
If envelopes are printed out with wrinkles, creases, or black bold lines, open the
rear cover and try printing again. Keep the rear cover opened during printing.
•
When selecting envelopes, consider the following factors:
-
Weight: should not exceed 90 g/m2 otherwise; jams may occur.
-
Construction: should lie flat with less than 6 mm curl and should not
contain air.
-
Condition: should not be wrinkled, nicked, nor damaged.
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
46
Media and tray
-
Temperature: should resist the heat and pressure of the machine
during operation.
•
Use only well-constructed envelopes with sharp and well-creased folds.
•
Do not use stamped envelopes.
•
Do not use envelopes with clasps, snaps, windows, coated lining, selfadhesive seals, or other synthetic materials.
•
Do not use damaged or poorly made envelopes.
•
Be sure the seam at both ends of the envelope extends all the way to the
corner of the envelope.
1
2
•
Transparency
To avoid damaging the machine, use only transparencies designed for use in
laser printers.
Acceptable
Unacceptable
Envelopes with a peel-off adhesive strip or with more than one flap that
folds over to seal must use adhesives compatible with the machine’s fusing
temperature for 0.1 second about 170°C (338 °F). The extra flaps and strips
might cause wrinkling, creasing, or jams, and may even damage the fuser
unit.
•
For the best print quality, position margins no closer than 15 mm from the
edges of the envelope.
•
Avoid printing over the area where the envelope’s seams meet.
•
Must withstand the machine’s fusing temperature.
•
Place them on a flat surface after removing them from the machine.
•
Do not leave unused transparencies in the paper tray for long. Dust and dirt
may accumulate on them, resulting in spotty printing.
•
To avoid smudging caused by fingerprints, handle them carefully.
•
To avoid fading, do not expose printed transparencies to prolonged
sunlight.
•
Ensure that transparencies are not wrinkled, curled, or have any torn edges.
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
47
Media and tray
•
Do not use transparencies that separate from the backing sheet.
•
To prevent transparencies from sticking to each other, do not let the printed
sheets stack up as they are being printed out.
•
Recommended media: Transparency for a color laser printer by Xerox, such
as 3R 91331(A4), 3R 2780 (Letter).
Labels
To avoid damaging the machine, use only labels designed for use in laser
printers.
•
When selecting labels, consider the following factors:
-
Adhesives: Should be stable at your machine’s fusing temperature.
Check your machine’s specifications to view the fusing temperature
(about 170°C (338°F)).
-
Arrangement: Only use labels with no exposed backing between them.
Labels can peel off sheets that have spaces between the labels, causing
serious jams.
-
Curl: Must lie flat with no more than 13 mm of curl in any direction.
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
48
Media and tray
-
Condition: Do not use labels with wrinkles, bubbles, or other
indications of separation.
•
Make sure that there is no exposed adhesive material between labels.
Exposed areas can cause labels to peel off during printing, which can cause
paper jams. Exposed adhesive can also cause damage to machine
components.
•
Do not run a sheet of labels through the machine more than once. The
adhesive backing is designed for only a single pass through the machine.
•
Do not use labels that are separating from the backing sheet or are wrinkled,
bubbled, or otherwise damaged.
Card stock/ Custom-sized paper
•
In the software application, set the margins to at least 6.4 mm (0.25 inches)
away from the edges of the material.
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
49
Media and tray
Preprinted paper
7
Setting the paper size and type
When loading preprinted paper, the printed side should be facing up with an
uncurled edge at the front. If you experience problems with paper feeding, turn
the paper around. Note that print quality is not guaranteed.
After loading paper in the paper tray, set the paper size and type using the
control panel buttons.
The paper setting in the machine and driver should match to print without a
paper mismatch error.
To change the paper setting set in the machine, from the Samsung Easy Printer
Manager select
(Switch to advanced mode) > Device Settings.
Or if your machine supports a display screen, you can set it using the
(Menu)
button on the control panel.
Then, set the paper type from the Printing preferences window > Paper tab >
Paper Type (see "Opening printing preferences" on page 57).
•
Must be printed with heat-resistant ink that will not melt, vaporize, or
release hazardous emissions when subjected to the machine’s fusing
temperature for 0.1 second (about 170°C (338°F)).
•
Preprinted paper ink must be non-flammable and should not adversely
affect machine rollers.
•
Before you load preprinted paper, verify that the ink on the paper is dry.
During the fusing process, wet ink can come off preprinted paper, reducing
print quality.
It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for some
models.
1
Select
(Menu) > System Setup > Paper Setup > Paper Size or
Paper Type on the control panel.
2
3
Select the tray and the option you want.
Press OK to save the selection.
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
50
Media and tray
9
• If you want to use special-sized paper such as billing paper, select the
Paper tab > Size > Edit... and set Custom Paper Size Settings in the
Printing Preferences (see "Opening printing preferences" on page 57).
8
Preparing originals
•
Do not load paper smaller than 142 x 148 mm (5.6 x 5.8 inches) or larger than
216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches).
•
Do not attempt to load the following s of paper, in order to prevent paper
jam, low print quality and machine damage.
Using the output support
The surface of the output tray may become hot if you print a large number
of pages at one. Make sure that you do not touch the surface, and do not
allow children near it.
The printed pages stack on the output support, and the output support will help
the printed pages to align. Unfold the output support.
1
2
-
Carbon-paper or carbon-backed paper
-
Coated paper
-
Onion skin or thin paper
-
Wrinkled or creased paper
-
Curled or rolled paper
-
Torn paper
•
Remove all staples and paper clips before loading.
•
Make sure any glue, ink, or correction fluid on the paper is completely dry
before loading.
•
Do not load originals that include different sizes or weights of paper.
•
Do not load booklets, pamphlets, transparencies, or documents with other
unusual characteristics.
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
51
Media and tray
10
Loading originals
2
Place the original face down on the scanner glass. Align it with the
registration guide at the top left corner of the glass.
3
Close the scanner lid.
You can use the scanner glass or the document feeder to load an original for
copying, scanning, and sending a fax.
On the scanner glass
Using the scanner glass, you can copy or scan originals. You can get the best
scan quality, especially for colored or gray-scaled images. Make sure that no
originals are in the document feeder. If an original is detected in the document
feeder, the machine gives it priority over the original on the scanner glass.
1
Lift and open the scanner lid.
• Leaving the scanner lid open while copying may affect copy quality and
toner consumption.
• Dust on the scanner glass may cause black spots on the printout. Always
keep it clean (see "Cleaning the machine" on page 86).
• If you are copying a page from a book or magazine, lift the scanner lid
until its hinges are caught by the stopper and then close the lid. If the
book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm, start copying with the scanner
lid open.
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
52
Media and tray
• Be careful not to break the scanner glass. You may get hurt.
• Do not put hands while closing the scanner lid. The scanner lid may fall
on your hands and get hurt.
2
Load the original face up into the document feeder input tray. Make sure
that the bottom of the original stack matches the paper size marked on
the document input tray.
• Do not look into the light from inside of the scanner while copying or
scanning. It is harmful to eyes.
In the document feeder
Using the document feeder, you can load up to 40 sheets of paper (80 g/m2, 21
lbs bond) for one job.
1
Flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before
loading originals.
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
53
3
Adjust the document feeder width guides to the paper size.
• Dust on the document feeder glass may cause black lines on the
printout. Always keep the glass clean (see "Cleaning the machine" on
page 86).
• To print on both sides of the paper using the ADF, from the control panel
press
(Copy) >
(Menu) > Copy Feature > Duplex > 1 -> 2
Sided or 1 -> 2 Sided Rot. and print on one side of the paper, then reload
the sheet to print on the other side.
Duplex printing might not be available for some models (see "Features
by model" on page 7).
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
54
Basic printing
Basic printing
3
Select your machine from the Select Printer list.
4
The basic print settings including the number of copies and print range
are selected within the Print window.
• For special printing features, refer to the Advanced Guide (see "Using
advanced print features" on page 232).
• Depending on models or options, some menus may not be supported
(see "Features by model" on page 7).
11
Printing
• If you are a Mac, Linux, or UNIX operating systems user, refer to the "Mac
printing" on page 239 or "Linux printing" on page 241 UNIX.
• For Windows 8 user, see "Basic printing" on page 277.
To take advantage of the advanced printing features, click Properties or
Preferences from the Print window (see "Opening printing preferences" on
page 57).
The following Printing Preferences window is for Notepad in Windows 7.
1
2
Open the document you want to print.
Select Print from the File menu.
5
To start the print job, click OK or Print in the Print window.
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
55
Basic printing
12
Canceling a print job
If the print job is waiting in the print queue or print spooler, cancel the job as
follows:
•
You can access this window by simply double-clicking the machine icon
(
•
) in the Windows task bar.
You can also cancel the current job by pressing
the control panel.
(Stop/Clear) button on
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
56
Basic printing
13
Opening printing preferences
The screenshot may differ depending on model.
• The Printing Preferences window that appears in this user’s guide may
differ depending on the machine in use.
• When you select an option in Printing Preferences, you may see a
warning mark
or
. An
mark means you can select that certain
option but it is not recommended, and an
mark means you cannot
select that option due to the machine’s setting or environment.
• For Windows 8 user, see "Opening more settings" on page 278.
1
2
3
4
Open the document you want to print.
Select Print from the file menu. The Print window appears.
Select your machine from the Select Printer.
Click Properties or Preferences.
• You can apply Eco features to save paper and toner before printing (see
"Easy Eco Driver" on page 265).
• You can check the machine’s current status pressing the Printer Status
button (see "Using Samsung Printer Status" on page 273).
Using a favorite setting
The Favorites option, which is visible on each preferences tab except for
Favorites tab and Samsung tab, allows you to save the current preferences for
future use.
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
57
Basic printing
To save a Favorites item, follow these steps:
14
Using help
1
2
Change the settings as needed on each tab.
Enter a name for the item in the Favorites input box.
Click the option you want to know on the Printing Preferences window and
press F1 on your keyboard.
15
Eco printing
The Eco function reduces toner consumption and paper usage. The Eco
function allows you to save print resources and lead you to eco-friendly printing.
3
4
5
Click Save.
Enter name and description, and then select the desired icon.
Click OK. When you save Favorites, all current driver settings are saved.
To use a saved setting, select it in the Favorites tab. The machine is now set
to print according to the settings you have selected. To delete saved
settings, select it in the Favorites tab and click Delete.
If you press the Eco button from the control panel, Eco mode is enabled. The
default setting of Eco mode is double-sided printing (long edge), multiple pages
per side (2-up), skip blank pages, and toner save. Some features may not be
available depending on the model.
• Double-sided printing (Long Edge) feature is only available for duplex
models (see "Variety feature" on page 10).
• Depending on the printer driver you use, skip blank pages may not work
properly. If skip blank pages feature does not work properly, set the
feature from the Easy Eco Driver (see "Easy Eco Driver" on page 265).
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
58
Basic printing
Setting Eco mode on the control panel
•
• Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Accessing the
menu" on page 33).
• It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for
some models.
1
Select
(Menu) > System Setup > Machine Setup > Eco Settings on
the control panel.
2
Select the option you want and press OK.
•
Default Mode: Select this to turn on or off the Eco mode (Duplex
(long edge), Toner save, 2-up, and Skip blank pages).
Duplex printing and Skip blank pages might not be available for
some models you use (see "Features by model" on page 7).
3
Change Template: Follow the settings from Syncthru™ Web Service
or Samsung Easy Printer Manager. Before you select this item, you
must set the Eco function in SyncThru™ Web Service (Settings tab >
Machine Settings > System > Eco Settings) or Samsung Easy
Printer Manager (Device Settings > Eco).
Press OK to save the selection.
Setting Eco mode on the driver
Open the Eco tab to set Eco mode. When you see the eco image (
means the Eco mode is currently enabled.
), that
Eco options
•
Printer Default: Follows the settings from the machine's control panel.
-
Off: Set the Eco mode off.
•
None: Disables Eco mode.
-
On: Set the Eco mode on.
•
Eco Printing: Enables Eco mode. Activate the various eco items you want to
use.
•
Password: If the administrator has enabled Eco mode, you have to
If you set the Eco mode on with a password from the SyncThru™ Web
Service (Settings tab > Machine Settings > System > Eco Settings), the
On force message appears. You have to enter the password to change the
Eco mode status.
enter the password to change the status.
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
59
Result simulator
Result Simulator shows the results of reduced emission of carbon dioxide, used
electricity, and the amount of saved paper in accordance with the settings you
selected.
•
The results are calculated on the basis that the total number of printed
paper is one hundred without a blank page when the Eco mode is disabled.
•
Refers to the calculation coefficient about CO2, energy, and paper from IEA,
the index of Ministry of Internal Affairs and Communication of Japan and
www.remanufacturing.org.uk. Each model has a different index.
•
The power consumption in printing mode refers to the average printing
power consumption of this machine.
•
The actual saved or reduced amount may differ depending on the operating
system used, computing performance, application software, connection
method, media, media size, job complexity, etc.
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
60
Basic copying
Basic copying
2
Place a single document (see "Loading originals" on page 52).
3
If you want to customize the copy settings including Reduce/Enlarge,
Darkness, Original, and more by using the control panel buttons (see
"Changing the settings for each copy" on page 62).
4
Enter the number of copies using the arrow or number keypad, if
necessary.
5
Press
• For special printing features, refer to the Advanced Guide (see "Copy
menu" on page 211).
• Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Accessing the
menu" on page 33 or "Control panel overview" on page 24).
• Depending on models or options, some menus may not be supported
(see "Features by model" on page 7).
16
Basic copy
1
Select
Or select
(copy) >
(Menu) > Copy Feature on the control panel.
(Menu) > Copy Feature on the control panel.
(Start).
If you need to cancel the copying job during the operation, press
Clear) and the copying will stop.
(Stop/
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
61
Basic copying
17
Changing the settings for each copy
Your machine provides default settings for copying so that you can quickly and
easily make a copy. However, if you want to change the options for each copy,
use the copy function buttons on the control panel.
2
Select the option you want and press OK.
For example, the Light+5 being the lightest, and the Dark+5 being the
darkest.
3
Press
(Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode.
Original
• If you press
(Stop/Clear) while setting the copy options, all of the
options you have set for the current copy job will be canceled and
returned to their default status. Or, they will automatically return to their
default status after the machine completes the copy in progress.
• Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Accessing the
menu" on page 33).
The original setting is used to improve the copy quality by selecting the
document for the current copy job.
1
• It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for
some models.
Or select
panel.
2
Darkness
Select
(copy) >
control panel.
If you have an original containing faint marking and dark images, you can adjust
the brightness to make a copy that is easier to read.
(Menu) > Copy Feature > Original Type on the
(Menu) > Copy Feature > Original Type on the control
Select the option you want and press OK.
•
Text: Use for originals containing mostly text.
•
Text/Photo: Use for originals with mixed text and photographs.
If texts in the printout is blurry, select Text to get the clear texts.
1
Select
(copy) >
control panel.
(Menu) > Copy Feature > Darkness on the
•
Photo: Use when the originals are photographs.
Or select Darkness button on the control panel.
3
Press
(Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode.
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
62
Basic copying
Reduced or enlarged copy
You can reduce or enlarge the size of a copied image from 25% to 400% when
you copy original documents from the scanner glass.
To scale the copy by directly entering the scale rate
1
Or select
panel.
• This feature may not be available depending on model or optional
goods (see "Variety feature" on page 10).
• If the machine set to Eco mode, reduce and enlarge features are not
available.
To select from the predefined copy sizes
1
Select
(copy) >
the control panel.
Or select
panel.
2
3
(Menu) > Copy Feature > Reduce/Enlarge on
Select
(copy) >
(Menu) > Copy Feature > Reduce/Enlarge >
Custom on the control panel.
2
3
4
(Menu) > Copy Feature > Reduce/Enlarge on the control
Enter the copy size you want using the numeric keypad.
Press OK to save the selection.
Press
(Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode.
When you make a reduced copy, black lines may appear at the bottom of
your copy.
(Menu) > Copy Feature > Reduce/Enlarge on the control
Select the option you want and press OK.
Press
(Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode.
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
63
Basic copying
18
ID card copying
Your machine can print 2-sided originals on one sheet.
1
Press ID Copy on the control panel.
2
Place the front side of an original facing down on the scanner glass
where arrows indicate as shown. Then, close the scanner lid.
3
4
Place Front Side and Press [Start] appears on the display.
The machine prints one side of the original on the upper half of the paper and
the other side on the lower half without reducing the size of the original. This
feature is helpful for copying a small-sized item such as business card.
• The original must be placed on the scanner glass to use this feature.
• If the machine set to Eco mode, this feature is not available.
• For better image quality, Select
(copy) >
(Menu) > Copy
Feature > Original Type > Photo on the control panel or
Copy Feature > Original Type > Photo.
(Menu) >
Press Start.
Your machine begins scanning the front side and shows Place Back Side
and Press [Start].
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
64
5
Turn the original over and place it on the scanner glass where arrows indicate as shown. Then, close the scanner lid.
6
Press Start.
• If you do not press the
copied.
(Start) button, only the front side will be
• If the original is larger than the printable area, some portions may not be
printed.
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
65
Basic scanning
• For special scanning features, refer to the Advanced Guide (see "Scan
features" on page 245).
If you see Not Available message, check the port connection, or select
Enable Scan from Device Panel in Samsung Easy Printer Manager >
• Depending on models or options, some menus may not be supported
(see "Features by model" on page 7).
Switch to advanced mode > Scan to PC Settings.
3
19
Basic Scanning
Select the application program you want and press OK.
Default setting is My Documents.
This is the normal and usual procedure for scanning originals.
You can add or delete the folder where the scanned file is saved in
This is a basic scanning method for USB-connected machine.
Samsung Easy Printer Manager >
Scan to PC Settings.
Switch to advanced mode. >
• It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for
some models.
• if you want to scan using the network, refer to the Advanced Guide (see
"Scanning from network connected machine" on page 250).
1
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on
page 52).
4
5
Select the option you want and press OK.
Scanning begins.
Scanned image is saved in computer’s C:\Users\users name\My
• Documents. The saved folder may differ, depending on your operating
system or the application you are using.
2
Select
(scan) > Scan to PC > Local PC on the control panel.
Or select Scan to > Local PC on the control panel.
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
66
Basic faxing
Basic faxing
• For special faxing features, refer to the Advanced Guide (See "Fax
features" on page 252).
• Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Accessing the
menu" on page 33 or "Control panel overview" on page 24).
•
20
Preparing to fax
Before you send or receive a fax, you need to connect the supplied line cord to
your telephone wall jack (see "Rear view" on page 23). Refer to the Quick
Installation Guide how to make a connection. The method of making a
telephone connection is different from one country to another.
M267xN/M287xND/M287xDW does not support fax features.
21
• You cannot use this machine as a fax via the internet phone. For more
information ask your internet service provider.
Sending a fax
• We recommend using traditional analog phone services (PSTN: Public
Switched Telephone Network) when connecting telephone lines to use
a fax machine. If you use other Internet services (DSL, ISDN, VolP), you can
improve the connection quality by using the Micro-filter. The Micro-filter
eliminates unnecessary noise signals and improves connection quality or
Internet quality. Since the DSL Micro-filter is not provided with the
machine, contact your Internet service provider for use on DSL Microfilter.
1 Line port
2 Micro filter
3 DSL modem / Telephone line
(see "Rear view" on page 23).
When you place the originals, you can use either the document feeder or
the scanner glass. If the originals are placed on both the document feeder
and the scanner glass, the machine will read the originals on the document
feeder first, which has higher priority in scanning.
1
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on
page 52).
2
3
Select
4
Enter the destination fax number.
(fax) on the control panel.
Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs (see
"Adjusting the document settings" on page 69).
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
67
Basic faxing
5
Press
(Start) on the control panel. The machine starts to scan and
send the fax to the destinations.
5
6
Enter a fax number using the number keypad on the control panel.
Press
(Start) on the control panel when you hear a high-pitched fax
signal from the remote fax machine.
• If you want to send a fax directly from your computer, use Samsung
Network PC Fax (see "Sending a fax in the computer" on page 253).
• When you want to cancel a fax job, press
machine starts transmission.
(Stop/Clear) before the
• If you used the scanner glass, the machine shows the message asking to
place another page.
Sending a fax to multiple destinations
You can use the multiple send feature, which allows you to send a fax to multiple
locations. Originals are automatically stored in memory and sent to a remote
station. After transmission, the originals are automatically erased from memory
(see "Features by model" on page 7).
Sending a fax manually
Perform the following to send a fax using (On Hook Dial) on the control
panel. If your machine is a handset model, you can send a fax using the handset
(see "Features by model" on page 7).
1
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on
page 52).
2
3
Select
4
Press
(fax) on the control panel.
Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs (see
"Adjusting the document settings" on page 69).
You cannot send faxes with this feature if you have chosen super fine as an
option or if the fax is in color.
1
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on
page 52).
2
3
Select
4
Select
(fax) on the control panel.
Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs (see
"Adjusting the document settings" on page 69).
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Multi Send on the control panel.
(On Hook Dial) on the control panel or lift the handset.
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
68
Basic faxing
5
Enter the number of the first receiving fax machine and press OK.
You can press speed dial numbers or select a group dial number using
the
6
(Address book) button.
Enter the second fax number and press OK.
23
Adjusting the document settings
Before starting a fax, change the following settings according to your original’s
status to get the best quality.
The display asks you to enter another fax number to send the document.
7
• Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Accessing the
menu" on page 33 or "Control panel overview" on page 24).
To enter more fax numbers, press OK when Yes appears and repeat
steps 5 and 6. You can add up to 10 destinations.
• It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for
some models.
Once you have entered a group dial number, you cannot enter another
group dial number.
Resolution
8
When you have finished entering fax numbers, select No at the Another
No.? prompt and press OK.
The machine begins sending the fax to the numbers you entered in the
order in which you entered them.
22
The default document settings produce good results when using typical textbased originals. However, if you send originals that are of poor quality, or
contain photographs, you can adjust the resolution to produce a higher quality
fax.
1
Select
panel.
2
Select the option you want and press OK.
Receiving a fax
Your machine is preset to Fax mode at the factory. When you receive a fax, the
machine answers the call on a specified number of rings and automatically
receives the fax.
(fax) >
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Resolution on the control
•
Standard: Originals with normal sized characters.
•
Fine: Originals containing small characters or thin lines or originals
printed using a dot-matrix printer.
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
69
Basic faxing
•
Super Fine: Originals containing extremely fine detail. Super Fine
mode is enabled only if the machine with which you are
communicating also supports the Super Fine resolution.
Darkness
You can select the degree of darkness of the original document.
• For memory transmission, Super Fine mode is not available. The
resolution setting is automatically changed to Fine.
• When your machine is set to Super Fine resolution and the fax machine
with which you are communicating does not support Super Fine
resolution, the machine transmits using the highest resolution mode
supported by the other fax machine.
•
Photo Fax: Originals containing shades of gray or photographs.
•
Color Fax: Original with colors.
The darkness setting is applied to the current fax job. To change the default
setting (see "Fax menu" on page 214).
1
Select
panel.
2
3
Select a darkness level you want.
Press
(fax) >
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Darkness on the control
(Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode.
• Memory transmission is not available in this mode.
• You can only send a color fax if the machine you are communicating with
supports color fax reception and you send the fax manually.
3
Press
(Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode.
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
70
3. Maintenance
This chapter provides information about purchasing supplies, accessories and maintenance parts available for your
machine.
• Ordering supplies and accessories
71
• Available supplies
72
• Available maintenance parts
73
• Storing the toner cartridge
74
• Redistributing toner
76
• Replacing the toner cartridge
79
• Replacing the imaging unit
82
• Monitoring the supplies life
84
• Setting the toner low alert
85
• Cleaning the machine
86
• Tips for moving & storing your machine
93
Ordering supplies and accessories
Available accessories may differ from country to country. Contact your sales representatives to obtain the list of available supplies, and maintenance parts.
To order Samsung-authorized supplies, accessories, and maintenance parts, contact your local Samsung dealer or the retailer where you purchased your machine.
You can also visit www.samsung.com/supplies, and then select your country/region to obtain the contact information for service.
3. Maintenance
71
Available supplies
When supplies reach the end of their life spans, you can order the following s of supplies for your machine:
Type
Toner cartridge
Imaging Unit
Model
Average yielda
Part name
M2670/M2671/M2870/M2880 series
Approx. 3,000 pages
MLT-D115L
M2675/M2676/M2875/M2876/M2885/
M2886 series
Approx. 1,200 pages
MLT-D116Sb
Approx. 3,000 pages
MLT-D116L
Approx. 9,000 pages
MLT-R116
M2675/M2676/M2875/M2876/M2885/
M2886 series
a. Declared yield value in accordance with ISO/IEC 19752.
b. Not supported for India.
3. Maintenance
72
Available maintenance parts
You need to replace the maintenance parts at specific intervals to keep the machine in the best condition and avoid print quality and paper feeding problems
resulting from the worn-out parts. Maintenance parts are mostly rollers, belts and pads. However, the replacement period and parts may differ depending on the
model. Replacing maintenance parts can be performed only by an authorized service provider, dealer, or the retailer where you bought the machine. To purchase
maintenance parts, contact the retailer where you bought the machine. The replacement period for the maintenance parts is informed by the Samsung Printer Status
program. Or if your machine supports display screen, a message is displayed in the display screen. The replacement period varies based on the operating system
used, computing performance, application software, connecting method, paper type, paper size, and job complexity.
3. Maintenance
73
Storing the toner cartridge
Toner cartridges contain components that are sensitive to light, temperature
and humidity. Samsung suggests users follow these recommendations to
ensure optimal performance, highest quality, and longest life from your new
Samsung toner cartridge.
Store the cartridge in the same environment in which the printer will be used.
This should be in controlled temperature and humidity conditions. The toner
cartridge should remain in their original and unopened package until
installation – if original packaging is not available, cover the top opening of the
cartridge with paper and store in a dark cabinet.
Opening the cartridge package prior to use dramatically shortens its useful shelf
and operating life. Do not store on the floor. If the toner cartridge is removed
from the printer, follow the instructions below to store the toner cartridge
properly.
•
Store the cartridge inside the protective bag from the original package.
•
Store lying flat (not standing on end) with the same side facing up as if it
were installed in the machine.
•
Do not store consumables in any of the following conditions:
-
Temperature greater than 40°C (104°F).
-
Humidity range less than 20% or greater than 80%.
-
An environment with extreme changes in humidity or temperature.
-
Direct sunlight or room light.
-
Dusty places.
-
A car for a long period of time.
-
An environment where corrosive gases are present.
-
An environment with salty air.
1
Handling instructions
•
Do not touch the surface of the photoconductive drum in the cartridge.
•
Do not expose the cartridge to unnecessary vibrations or shock.
•
Never manually rotate the drum, especially in the reverse direction; this can
cause internal damage and toner spillage.
2
Toner cartridge usage
Samsung Electronics does not recommend or approve the use of non-Samsung
brand toner cartridges in your printer including generic, store brand, refilled, or
remanufactured toner cartridges.
Samsung’s printer warranty does not cover damage to the machine caused
by the use of refilled, remanufactured, or non-Samsung brand toner
cartridges.
3. Maintenance
74
Storing the toner cartridge
3
Estimated cartridge life
Estimated cartridge life (the life of the toner cartridge yield) depends on the
amount of toner that print jobs require. The actual print yield may vary
depending on the print density of the pages you print on, operating
environment, percentage of image area, printing interval, media type and/or
media size. For example, if you print a lot of graphics, the consumption of the
toner is higher and you may need to change the cartridge more often.
3. Maintenance
75
Redistributing toner
When the toner cartridge is near the end of its life:
•
White streaks or light printing occurs and/or density varies from side to side.
•
The Status LED blinks red.
If this happens, you can temporarily improve print quality by redistributing the remaining toner in the cartridge. In some cases, white streaks or light printing will still
occur even after you have redistributed the toner.
• Illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Machine overview" on page
21).
• If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash clothing in cold water: hot water sets toner into fabric.
• To prevent damage to the toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few minutes. Cover it with a piece of paper, if necessary.
• Do not touch the green area of the toner cartridge. Use the handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this area.
• Do not use sharp objects such as a knife or scissors to open the toner cartridge package. They might scratch the drum of the cartridge.
• If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash clothing in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric.
3. Maintenance
76
Redistributing toner
4
M2670/M2671/M2870/M2880 series
2
1
3. Maintenance
77
Redistributing toner
5
M2675/M2676/M2875/M2876/M2885/M2886 series
2
1
3. Maintenance
78
Replacing the toner cartridge
• Shake the toner cartridge thoroughly, it will increase the initial print quality.
• Illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page 22).
• To prevent damage to the toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few minutes. Cover it with a piece of paper, if necessary.
• Do not touch the green area of the toner cartridge. Use the handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this area.
• Do not use sharp objects such as a knife or scissors to open the toner cartridge package. They might scratch the drum of the cartridge.
• If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash clothing in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric.
3. Maintenance
79
Replacing the toner cartridge
6
M2670/M2671/M2870/M2880 series
When a toner cartridge has reached the end of life, the machine will stop printing.
3. Maintenance
80
Replacing the toner cartridge
7
M2675/M2676/M2875/M2876/M2885/M2886 series
When a toner cartridge has reached the end of life, the machine will stop printing.
3. Maintenance
81
Replacing the imaging unit
When a imaging unit has reached the end of life, the machine will stop printing.
• To prevent damage to the toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few minutes. Cover it with a piece of paper, if necessary.
• Do not touch the green area of the toner cartridge. Use the handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this area.
• Do not use sharp objects such as a knife or scissors to open the toner cartridge package. They might scratch the drum of the cartridge.
• If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash clothing in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric.
3. Maintenance
82
Replacing the imaging unit
8
M2675/M2676/M2875/M2876/M2885/M2886 series
2
1
1
2
3. Maintenance
83
Monitoring the supplies life
If you experience frequent paper jams or printing problems, check the number of pages the machine has printed or scanned. Replace the corresponding parts, if
necessary.
It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for some models.
1
2
3
Select
(Menu) > System Setup > Maintenance > Supplies Life on the control panel.
Select the option you want and press OK.
Press
(Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode.
3. Maintenance
84
Setting the toner low alert
If the amount of toner in the cartridge is low, a message or LED informing the
user to change the toner cartridge appears. You can set the option for whether
or not this message or LED appears.
• Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Accessing the
menu" on page 33).
• It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for
some models.
• You can set the machine’s settings by using the Device Settings in
Samsung Easy Printer Manager program.
- For Windows and Mac users, you set from Samsung Easy Printer
Manager >
(Switch to advanced mode) > Device Settings.
1
Select
(Menu) > System Setup > Maintenance > TonerLowAlert on
the control panel.
2
3
Select the option you want.
Press OK to save the selection.
3. Maintenance
85
Cleaning the machine
If printing quality problems occur or if you use your machine in a dusty environment, you need to clean your machine regularly to keep it in the best printing
condition and use your machine longer.
• Cleaning the cabinet of the machine with cleaning materials containing large amounts of alcohol, solvents, or other strong substances can discolor or distort the
cabinet.
• If your machine or the surrounding area is contaminated with toner, we recommend you use a cloth or tissue dampened with water to clean it. If you use a vacuum
cleaner, toner blows in the air and might be harmful to you.
• During the printing process, paper, toner, and dust particles can accumulate inside the machine. This buildup can cause print quality problems, such as toner
specks or smearing. Cleaning the inside of the machine clears and reduces these problems.
9
Cleaning the outside or the display screen
Clean the machine cabinet or the display screen with a soft, lint-free cloth. Dampen the cloth slightly with water, but be careful not to let any water drip onto or into
the machine.
3. Maintenance
86
Cleaning the machine
10
Cleaning the inside
During the printing process, paper, toner, and dust particles can accumulate inside the machine. This buildup can cause print quality problems, such as toner specks
or something. Cleaning the inside of the machine clears and reduces these problems.
• To prevent damage to the toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few minutes. Cover it with a piece of paper, if necessary.
• Do not touch the green area of the toner cartridge. Use the handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this area.
• Use a dry lint free cloth when cleaning the inside of the machine, be careful not to damage the transfer roller or any other inside parts. Do not use solvents such
as benzene or thinner. Printing quality problems can occur and cause damage to the machine.
• Use a dry lint-free cloth to clean the machine.
• Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord. Wait for the machine to cool down. If your machine has a power switch, turn the power switch off before
cleaning the machine.
• Before opening the front cover, close the output support first.
• Illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Machine overview" on page
21).
3. Maintenance
87
Cleaning the machine
M2670 series
M2671 series
M2870 series
M2880 series
M2675 series
M2676 series
M2875 series
M2876 series
M2885 series
M2886 series
1
2
M2670 series
M2671 series
M2870 series
M2880 series
M2675 series
M2676 series
M2875 series
M2876 series
M2885 series
M2886 series
2
1
3. Maintenance
88
Cleaning the machine
11
Cleaning the pickup roller
• Before opening the front cover, close the output support first.
• Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord. Wait for the machine to cool down. If your machine has a power switch, turn the power switch before cleaning
the machine.
• Illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Machine overview" on page
21).
3. Maintenance
89
Cleaning the machine
3. Maintenance
90
Cleaning the machine
12
Cleaning the scan unit
Keeping the scan unit clean helps ensure the best possible copies. We suggest that you clean the scan unit at the start of each day and during the day as needed.
• Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord. Wait for the machine to cool down. If your machine has a power switch, turn the power switch off before
cleaning the machine.
• Illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Machine overview" on page
21).
1
2
3
Slightly dampen a soft, lint-free cloth or paper towel with water.
Lift and open the scanner lid.
Wipe the surface of the scanner glass until it is clean and dry.
3. Maintenance
91
Cleaning the machine
1
2
3
4
4
5
Scanner lid
Scanner glass
Document feeder glass
White bar
Wipe the underside of the scanner lid and white sheet until it is clean and dry.
Close the scanner lid.
3. Maintenance
92
Tips for moving & storing your machine
•
When moving the machine, do not tilt or turn it upside down. Otherwise, the inside of the machine may be contaminated by toner, which can cause damage to
the machine or reduce print quality.
•
When moving the machine, make sure at least two people are holding the machine securely.
3. Maintenance
93
4. Troubleshooting
This chapter gives helpful information for what to do if you encounter an error.
• Tips for avoiding paper jams
95
• Clearing original document jams
96
• Clearing paper jams
99
• Understanding the status LED
107
• Understanding display messages
110
This chapter gives helpful information for what to do if you encounter an error. If your machine
has a display screen, check the message on the display screen first to solve the error.
If you cannot find a solution to your problem in this chapter, refer to the Troubleshooting
chapter in the Advanced User's Guide (see "Troubleshooting" on page 281).
If you cannot find a solution in the User's Guide or the problem persists, call for service.
Tips for avoiding paper jams
By selecting the correct medias, most paper jams can be avoided. To avoid paper jams, refer to the following guidelines:
•
Ensure that the adjustable guides are positioned correctly (see "Tray overview" on page 40).
•
Do not overload the tray. Ensure that the paper level is below the paper capacity mark on the inside of the tray.
•
Do not remove paper from the tray while your machine is printing.
•
Flex, fan, and straighten paper before loading.
•
Do not use creased, damp, or highly curled paper.
•
Do not mix paper type and size in a tray.
•
Use only recommended print media (see "Print media specifications" on page 118).
4. Troubleshooting
95
Clearing original document jams
When an original document jams in the document feeder, a warning message appears on the display.
To avoid tearing the document, remove the jammed document slowly and carefully.
To prevent document jams, use the scanner glass for thick, thin or mixed paper- originals.
1
Original paper jam in front of scanner
4. Troubleshooting
96
Clearing original document jams
2
Original paper jam inside of scanner
4. Troubleshooting
97
Clearing original document jams
3
Original paper jam in exit area of scanner
1
2
Remove any remaining pages from the document feeder.
Gently remove the jammed paper from the document feeder.
4. Troubleshooting
98
Clearing paper jams
To avoid tearing the paper, pull the jammed paper out slowly and gently.
4
In tray
4. Troubleshooting
99
Clearing paper jams
5
In the manual tray
4. Troubleshooting
100
Clearing paper jams
6
Inside the machine
The fuser area is hot. Take care when removing paper from the machine.
4. Troubleshooting
101
Clearing paper jams
M2670/M2671/M2870/M2880 series
1
2
4. Troubleshooting
102
Clearing paper jams
M2675/M2676/M2875/M2876/M2885/M2886 series
1
2
4. Troubleshooting
103
Clearing paper jams
7
In the exit area
4. Troubleshooting
104
Clearing paper jams
8
In the duplex unit area
4. Troubleshooting
105
Clearing paper jams
If you do not see the paper in this area, stop and go to next step:
1
2
4. Troubleshooting
106
Understanding the status LED
The color of the LED indicates the machine's current status.
• Some LEDs may not be available depending on model or country.
• To resolve the error, look at the error message and its instructions from the troubleshooting part.
• You also can resolve the error with the guideline from the computer’s Printing Status or Smart Panel program window.
• If the problem persists, call a service representative.
4. Troubleshooting
107
Understanding the status LED
Status
Status
Description
Off
• The machine is off-line.
• The machine is in a power save mode.
Green
Blinking
When the backlight blinks, the machine is receiving or printing data.
On
The machine is on-line and can be used.
Orange
On
A paper jam has occurred (see "Clearing original document jams" on page 96, "Clearing paper jams" on page 99).
Red
Blinking
• A minor error has occurred and the machine is waiting for the error to be cleared. Check the display message. When
the problem is cleared, the machine resumes. For some models that does not support the display screen on the
control panel, this feature is not applicable.
• Small amount of toner is left in the cartridge. The estimated cartridge life of toner is close. Prepare a new cartridge for
replacement. You may temporarily increase the printing quality by redistributing the toner (see "Redistributing toner"
on page 76).
On
• A toner cartridge has almost reached its estimated cartridge lifea. It is recommended to replace the toner cartridge
(see "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 79).
• There is no paper in the tray. Load paper in the tray.
• The machine has stopped due to a major error. Check the display message (see "Understanding display messages" on
page 110).
• An imaging unit has almost reached its estimated cartridge lifeb. It is recommended to replace the toner cartridge (see
"Replacing the imaging unit" on page 82).
Wireless
Blue
Blinking
The machine is connecting to a wireless network.
On
The machine is connected to a wireless network (see "Wireless network setup" on page 165).
Off
The machine is disconnected from a wireless network.
4. Troubleshooting
108
Understanding the status LED
Status
Power/
Wake Up
Eco
Blue
Green
Description
On
The machine is in power save mode.
Off
The machine is in ready mode or machine’s power is off.
On
Eco mode is on (see"Eco printing" on page 58).
Off
Eco mode is off.
a. Estimated cartridge life means the expected or estimated toner cartridge life, which indicates the average capacity of print-outs and is designed pursuant to ISO/IEC 19752. The number of pages
may be affected by operating environment, percentage of image area, printing interval, graphics, media and media size. Some amount of toner may remain in the cartridge even when red LED is
on and the printer stops printing.
b. When the imaging unit has reached its end of life, the machine will stop printing. In this case, you can choose to stop or continue printing from the SyncThru™Web Service (Settings > Machine
Settings > System > Setup > Supplies Management> Imaging Unit Stop) or Samsung Easy Printer Manager (Device Settings > System > Supplies Management > Imaging Unit Stop).
Turning off this option and continuing to print may damage the device’s system.
4. Troubleshooting
109
Understanding display messages
Messages appear on the control panel display to indicate the machine’s status
or errors. Refer to the tables below to understand the messages’ and their
meaning, and correct the problem, if necessary.
Message
Meaning
Suggested solutions
• Paper Jam
in tray
Paper has jammed in
the paper feed area.
Clear the jam (see "In
tray" on page 99).
• You can resolve the error with the guideline from the computer’s
Printing Status program window (see "Using Samsung Printer Status" on
page 273).
• Paper Jam
in Manual Feeder
Paper has jammed in
the manual feeder.
Clear the jam (see "In the
manual tray" on page
100).
• If a message is not in the table, reboot the power and try the printing job
again. If the problem persists, call a service representative.
• Paper Jam
inside machine
Paper has jammed
inside the machine.
Clear the jam (see "Inside
the machine" on page
101).
• Paper Jam
in exit area
Paper has jammed in
the paper exit area.
Clear the jam (see "In the
exit area" on page 104).
• Paper Jam
bottom of duplex
Paper has jammed in
the duplex area.
Clear the jam (see "In the
duplex unit area" on
page 105).
• When you call for service, provide the service representative with the
contents of display message.
• Some messages may not appear on the display depending on the
options or models.
• [error number] indicates the error number.
• [tray type] indicates the tray number.
• Paper Jam top of duplex
9
Paper Jam-related messages
Message
• Document jam
Remove jam
Meaning
The loaded original
document has
jammed in the
document feeder.
Suggested solutions
Clear the jam (see
"Clearing original
document jams" on
page 96).
4. Troubleshooting
110
Understanding display messages
10
Toner-related messages
Message
Meaning
Suggested solutions
• Install Toner
A toner cartridge is not installed.
Install a toner cartridge.
• Not Compatible
Toner cartridge
The toner cartridge you have installed is not for your machine.
Install a Samsung-genuine toner cartridge, designed for your
machine.
• Prepare
new cartridge
Small amount of toner is left in the indicated cartridge. The
estimated cartridge life of toner is close.
Prepare a new cartridge for a replacement. You may temporarily
increase the printing quality by redistributing the toner (see
"Redistributing toner" on page 76).
4. Troubleshooting
111
Understanding display messages
Message
• Replace new cart
Meaning
Suggested solutions
The toner cartridge has almost reached its estimated cartridge
• You can choose Stop or Continue as shown on the control panel.
If you select Stop, the printer stops printing and you cannot print
any more without changing the cartridge. If you select Continue,
the printer keeps printing but the printing quality cannot be
guaranteed.
lifea.
• Replace the toner cartridge for the best print quality when this
message appears. Using a cartridge beyond this stage can result in
printing quality issues (see "Replacing the toner cartridge" on
page 79).
Samsung does not recommend using a non-genuine
Samsung toner cartridge such as refilled or remanufactured.
Samsung cannot guarantee a non-genuine Samsung toner
cartridge's quality. Service or repair required as a result of
using non-genuine Samsung toner cartridges will not be
covered under the machine warranty.
The toner cartridge has reached its estimated cartridge lifea.
If the machine stops printing, replace the toner cartridge (see
"Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 79).
a. Estimated cartridge life means the expected or estimated toner cartridge life, which indicates the average capacity of print-outs and is designed pursuant to ISO/IEC 19752 (see "Available supplies"
on page 72). The number of pages may be affected by operating environment, percentage of image area, printing interval, media, percentage of image area, and media size. Some amount of toner
may remain in the cartridge even when replace new cartridge appears and the machine stops printing.
4. Troubleshooting
112
Understanding display messages
11
12
Imaging unit-related messages
Message
Meaning
Tray-related messages
Suggested solutions
• Install
Imaging Unit
Imaging unit is not
installed.
Install an imaging unit.
• Invalid
Imaging Unit
The imaging unit you
have installed is not for
your machine.
Install a Samsunggenuine imaging unit,
designed for your
machine.
• Prepare New
Imaging Unit
The imaging unit has
almost reached its
estimated cartridge life.
Replace the imaging unit
as soon as possible.
Prepare a new imaging
unit for a replacement.
(see "Replacing the
imaging unit" on page
82).
The imaging unit has
reached its estimated
cartridge life.
Prepare a new imaging
unit for a replacement.
(see "Replacing the
imaging unit" on page
82).
• Replace
Imaging Unit
Message
Meaning
Suggested solutions
• Output bin full
Remove paper
The output tray is full.
Remove papers from the
output tray, the printer
resumes printing.
• Paper Empty
in [tray type]
There is no paper in tray
or manual feeder.
Load paper in tray (see
"Loading paper in the tray"
on page 42, "Loading
paper in the tray" on page
42).
• Tray Paper
mismatch
The paper size specified
in the printer properties
does not match the
paper you are loading.
Load the required size
paper.
• Manual Paper
mismatch
13
Network-related messages
Message
• Network Problem:
IP Conflict
Meaning
The network IP address
you have set is being
used by someone else.
Suggested solutions
Check the IP address and
reset it if necessary (see
Advanced Guide).
4. Troubleshooting
113
Understanding display messages
14
Misc. messages
Message
Meaning
Suggested solutions
• Door of scanner is
open
The document feeder
cover is not securely
latched.
Close the cover until it
locks into place.
• Error [error
number]
Turn off then on
The machine unit cannot
be controlled.
Reboot the power and try
the printing job again. If
the problem persists,
please call for service.
• Memory Full
Remove Job
The memory is full.
Print or remove the
received fax job in Secure
Receive (see Advanced
Guide).
4. Troubleshooting
114
5. Appendix
This chapter provides product specifications and information concerning applicable regulations.
• Specifications
116
• Regulatory information
126
• Copyright
139
Specifications
1
General specifications
The specification values listed below are subject to change without notice. See www.samsung.com for possible changes in information.
Items
Description
Dimensiona
Width x Length x Height
401 x 362 x 367 mm (15.8 x 14.2 x 14.4inches)
Weighta
Machine with consumables
• M2670 series: 10.8kg (23.8 lbs)
• M2870/M2880 series: 11.2kg (24.7 lbs)
• M2671/M2675/M2676 series: 11.1kg (24.5 lbs)
• M2875/M2876/M2885/M2886 series: 11.3kg (24.9 lbs)
Noise Levelbc
Ready mode
26 dB (A)
Print mode
Less than 50 dB (A)
Scan/Copy mode
52 dB (A)
(scanner glass)
Scan/Copy mode
53 dB (A)
(document feeder)
Temperature
Humidity
Operation
10 to 30°C (50 to 86°F)
Storage (packed)
-20 to 40°C (-4 to 104°F)
Operation
20 to 80% RH
Storage (packed)
10 to 90% RH
5. Appendix
116
Specifications
Items
Power ratingd
Power consumptione
Description
110 volt models
AC 110 - 127 V
220 volt models
AC 220 - 240 V
Average operating mode
Less than 400 W
Ready mode
Less than 50 W
Power save mode
• M287xFW/M287xDW/M288xFW/M288xHW: Less than 2.4 W (Wi-Fi Direct off: less than 1.6 W)
• M267xN/M267xF/M267xFH/M267xFN/ M267xHN/M287xND/M287xFD/M287xHN series: Less
than 1.1 W
Power off modef
Less than 0.2 W (0.1 Wg)
Network Standby Mode (All
Port Activation)
• M267xF/M267xFD: Less than 1W
• M267xFN: Less than 1.4W
• M287xFD/M287xND: Less than 1.35 W
• M287xDW: Less than 1.59 W
• M287xFW/M288xFW: Less than 1.95 W
Wirelessh
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
Module
SPW-B4319S
Dimensions and weight are measured without a handset.
Sound Pressure Level, ISO 7779. Configuration tested: basic machine installation, A4 paper, simplex printing.
China only: If the equipment's noise is louder than 63 db (A) ,the equipment should be placed in region of relatively independent advice.
See the rating label on the machine for the correct voltage (V), frequency (hertz) and of current (A) for your machine.
The power consumption may be affected by the machine’s status, setting conditions, operating environment, and measuring equipment and method the country uses.
Power consumption can be completely avoided only when the power cable is not connected.
For the machine that has a power switch.
M287xDW/M287xFW/M288xFW/M288xHW only (see "Features by model" on page 7).
5. Appendix
117
Specifications
2
Print media specifications
Print media weight/Capacitya
Type
Size
Dimensions
Manual feederb
Tray
Letter
216 x 279 mm (8.5 x 11 inches)
60 to 163 g/m2 (16 to 43 lbs bond)
60 to 220 g/m2 (16 to 59 lbs bond)
Legal
216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches)
• 250 sheets of 80 g/m2 (21 lbs bond)
•
US Folio
216 x 330 mm (8.5 x 13 inches)
A4
210 x 297 mm (8.27 x 11.69 inches)
Oficio
216 x 343 mm (8.5 x 13.5 inches)
JIS B5
182 x 257 mm (7.17 x 10.12 inches)
ISO B5
176 x 250 mm (6.93 x 9.84 inches)
Executive
184 x 267 mm (7.25 x 10.5 inches)
A5
148 x 210 mm (5.83 x 8.27 inches)
A6
105 x 148 mm (4.13 x 5.83 inches)
1 sheet of 80 g/m2 (21 lbs
bond)
Plain paper
5. Appendix
118
Specifications
Print media weight/Capacitya
Type
Size
Dimensions
Tray
Envelope
Monarch
98 x 191 mm (3.87 x 7.5 inches)
Envelope No. 10
105 x 241 mm (4.12 x 9.5 inches)
Envelope DL
110 x 220 mm (4.33 x 8.66 inches)
Envelope C5
162 x 229 mm (6.38 x 9.02 inches)
Envelope C6
114 x 162 mm (4.49 x 6.38 inches)
Thick paper
Refer to the Plain
paper section
Thicker paper
Manual feederb
Not available in tray
60 to 220 g/m2 (16 to 59 lbs bond)
Refer to the Plain paper section
91 to 105 g/m2 (24 to 28 lbs bond)
91 to 105 g/m2 (24 to 28 lbs bond)
Refer to the Plain
paper section
Refer to the Plain paper section
Not available in tray
164 to 220 g/m2 (44 to 59 lbs
bond)
Thin paper
Refer to the Plain
paper section
Refer to the Plain paper section
60 to 70 g/m2 (16 to 19 lbs bond)
60 to 70 g/m2 (16 to 19 lbs bond)
Transparency
Letter, A4
Refer to the Plain paper section
Not available in tray
138 to 146 g/m2 (37 to 39 lbs
bond)
Refer to the Plain paper section
Not available in tray
Labelsc
Letter, Legal, US
Folio, A4, JIS B5,
ISO B5, Executive,
A5
120 to 150 g/m2 (32 to 40 lbs
bond)
Envelope
5. Appendix
119
Specifications
Print media weight/Capacitya
Type
Size
Dimensions
Tray
Card stock
Letter, Legal, US
Folio, A4, JIS B5,
ISO B5, Executive,
A5,
Manual feederb
Refer to the Plain paper section
121 to 163 g/m2 (32 to 43 lbs bond)
121 to 163 g/m2 (32 to 43 lbs
bond)
Refer to the Plain paper section
106 to 120 g/m2 (28 to 32 lbs bond)
106 to 120 g/m2 (28 to 32 lbs
bond)
• Manual feeder: 76 x 127 mm (3 x 5 inches)
60 to 163 g/m2 (16 to 43 lbs bond) d, e
Postcard 4x6
Bond paper
Refer to the Plain
paper section
Minimum size (custom)
Maximum size (custom)
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
• Tray: 105 x 148.5 mm (4.13 x 5.85 inches)
216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches)
Maximum capacity may differ depending on media weight, thickness, and environmental conditions.
1 sheet for manual feeder.
The smoothness of the labels used in this machine is 100 to 250 (sheffield). This means the numeric level of smoothness.
The paper types available in the manual feeder: Plan, Thick, Thicker, Thin, Cotton, Colored, Pre-printed, Recycled, Envelope, Transparency, Labels, Cardstock, Bond, Archive
The paper types available in tray: Plan, Thick, Thin, Recycled, Cardstock, Bond, Archive
5. Appendix
120
Specifications
3
System requirements
Microsoft® Windows®
Requirement (recommended)
Operating system
CPU
RAM
free HDD space
Windows® XP
Intel® Pentium® III 933 MHz (Pentium IV 1 GHz)
128 MB (256 MB)
1.5 GB
Windows Server® 2003
Intel® Pentium® III 933 MHz (Pentium IV 1 GHz)
128 MB (512 MB)
1.25 GB to 2 GB
Windows Server® 2008
Intel® Pentium® IV 1 GHz (Pentium IV 2 GHz)
512 MB (2 GB)
10 GB
Windows Vista®
Intel® Pentium® IV 3 GHz
512 MB (1 GB)
15 GB
Windows® 7
Intel® Pentium® IV 1 GHz 32-bit or 64-bit processor or higher
1 GB (2 GB)
16 GB
• Support for DirectX® 9 graphics with 128 MB memory (to enable the Aero theme).
• DVD-R/W Drive
Windows Server® 2008 R2
Intel® Pentium® IV 1.4 GHz (x64) processors (2 GHz or faster)
512 MB (2 GB)
10 GB
Windows® 8
Intel® Pentium® IV 1 GHz 32-bit or 64-bit processor or higher
2 GB (2 GB)
20 GB
Windows® 8.1
• Support for DirectX® 9 graphics with 128 MB memory (to enable the Aero theme).
Windows® 10
• DVD-R/W Drive
512 MB (2 GB)
32GB
Windows Server® 2016
Windows Server® 2012
Intel® Pentium® IV 1.4 GHz (x64) processors (2 GHz or faster)
Windows Server® 2012 R2
5. Appendix
121
Specifications
• Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher is the minimum requirement for all Windows operating systems.
• Users who have administrator rights can install the software.
• Windows Terminal Services is compatible with your machine.
Mac
Requirements (Recommended)
Operating system
CPU
Mac OS X 10.5
• Intel® processors
RAM
Free HDD space
512 MB (1 GB)
1 GB
• 867 MHz or faster Power PC G4/G5
Mac OS X 10.6
• Intel® processors
1 GB (2 GB)
1 GB
Mac OS X 10.7-10.9
• Intel® processors
2 GB
4 GB
5. Appendix
122
Specifications
Linux
Items
Requirements
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5, 6
Fedora 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19
OpenSUSE 11.0, 11.1, 11.2, 11.3, 11.4, 12.1, 12.2, 12.3
Operating system
Ubuntu 10.04, 10.10, 11.04, 11.10, 12.04, 12.10, 13.04
SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 10, 11
Debian 5.0, 6.0, 7.0, 7.1
Mint 13, 14, 15
CPU
Pentium IV 2.4GHz (Intel Core™2)
RAM
512 MB (1 GB)
Free HDD space
1 GB (2 GB)
5. Appendix
123
Specifications
Unix
Items
Operating system
Requirements
Sun Solaris 9, 10, 11 (x86, SPARC)
HP-UX 11.0, 11i v1, 11i v2, 11i v3 (PA-RISC, Itanium)
IBM AIX 5.1, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 6.1, 7.1 (PowerPC)
Free HDD space
Up to 100 MB
5. Appendix
124
Specifications
4
Network environment
Network and wireless models only (see "Features by model" on page 7).
You need to set up the network protocols on the machine to use it as your network machine. The following table shows the network environments supported by the
machine.
Items
Network interface
Specifications
• Ethernet 10/100 Base-TX Wired Lan
• 802.11b/g/n Wireless LAN (M287xDW/M287xFW/M288xFW/M288xHW only)
Network operating system
• Windows Server 2003 /Server 2008/XP/Vista/7/8/Server 2008 R2
• Various Linux OS
• Mac OS X 10.5 - 10.9
• Unix
Network protocols
• TCP/IPv4
• DHCP, BOOTP
• DNS, WINS, Bonjour, SLP, UPnP
• Standard TCP/IP Printing (RAW), LPR, IPP, WSD
• SNMPv 1/2/3, HTTP, IPSec
• TCP/IPv6 (DHCP, DNS, RAW, LPR, SNMPv 1/2/3, HTTP, IPSec)
Wireless security
• Authentication: Open System, Shared Key, WPA Personal, WPA2 Personal (PSK)
• Encryption: WEP64, WEP128, TKIP, AES
5. Appendix
125
Regulatory information
This machine is designed for a normal work environment and certified with
several regulatory statements.
When using this product, these basic safety precautions should always be
followed to reduce risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons:
5
Laser safety statement
The printer is certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21
CFR, chapter 1 Subchapter J for Class I(1) laser products, and elsewhere is
certified as a Class I laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 608251 : 2007.
Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The laser system and
printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser radiation above
a Class I level during normal operation, user maintenance or prescribed service
condition.
Warning
Never operate or service the printer with the protective cover removed from
laser/scanner assembly. The reflected beam, although invisible, can damage
your eyes.
6
Ozone safety
This product’s ozone emission rate is under 0.1 ppm. Because
ozone is heavier than air, keep the product in a place with good
ventilation.
5. Appendix
126
Regulatory information
7
9
Power saver
China only
This printer contains advanced energy conservation technology
that reduces power consumption when it is not in active use.
When the printer does not receive data for an extended period of
time, power consumption is automatically lowered.
ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered U.S.
marks.
For more information on the ENERGY STAR program see http://
www.energystar.gov
For ENERGY STAR certified models, the ENRGY STAR label will be
on your machine. Check if your machine is ENERGY STAR
certified.
8
Recycling
Website: http://www.samsung.com/cn/support/location/
supportServiceLocation.do?page=SERVICE.LOCATION
襦 愤縑趀爮闭
賉帞
Xpress M2676N
Xpress M2676FH
Xpress M2671N
Xpress M2671FH
Xpress M2871HN
Xpress M2876HN
Xpress M2886HW
蜷筨愤竖爮襔*%
縑趀绌裎
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
術賉縑聱 ポkW·hマ
1.15
1.18
1.15
1.13
1.33
1.33
1.30
Recycle or dispose of the packaging material for this product in an
environmentally responsible manner.
5. Appendix
127
Regulatory information
10
Correct disposal of this product (Waste electrical &
electronic equipment)
(Applicable in countries with separate collection
systems)
(The United States of America only)
Dispose unwanted electronics through an approved recycler. To find the nearest
recycling location, go to our website: www.samsung.com/recyclingdirect Or
call, (877) 278 - 0799
11
EU REACH SVHC Declaration
This marking on the product, accessories or literature indicates that the
product and its electronic accessories (e.g. charger, headset, USB cable)
should not be disposed of with other household waste at the end of
their working life. To prevent possible harm to the environment or
human health from uncontrolled waste disposal, please separate these
items from other s of waste and recycle them responsibly to promote the
sustainable reuse of material resources.
Household users should contact either the retailer where they
purchased this product, or their local government office, for details of
where and how they can take these items for environmentally safe
recycling.
For information on Samsung’s environmental commitments and product
specific regulatory obligations e.g. REACH visit: www.samsung.com/uk/
aboutsamsung/samsungelectronics/corporatecitizenship/data_corner.html
12
State of California Proposition 65 Warning (USA
only)
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and
conditions of the purchase contract. This product and its electronic
accessories should not be mixed with other commercial wastes for
disposal.
5. Appendix
128
Regulatory information
13
Taiwan only
14
Radio frequency emissions
FCC information to the user
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
•
This device may not cause harmful interference, and
•
This device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class
B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed
to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may
cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this
equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following
measures:
•
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
•
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
•
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
•
Consult the dealer or experienced radio TV technician for help.
Change or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer
responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the
equipment.
5. Appendix
129
Regulatory information
Canadian radio interference regulations
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise
emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the interference-causing
equipment standard entitled “Digital Apparatus”, ICES-003 of the Industry and
Science Canada.
Cet appareil numérique respecte les limites de bruits radioélectriques
applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe B prescrites dans la norme sur le
matériel brouilleur: “Appareils Numériques”, ICES-003 édictée par l’Industrie et
Sciences Canada.
15
The FCC has set a general guideline of 20 cm (8 inches) separation between the
device and the body, for use of a wireless device near the body (this does not
include extremities). This device should be used more than 20 cm (8 inches)
from the body when wireless devices are on. The power output of the wireless
device (or devices), which may be embedded in your printer, is well below the
RF exposure limits as set by the FCC.
This transmitter must not be collocated or operation in conjunction with any
other antenna or transmitter.
Operation of this device is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This
device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
United States of America
Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
Wireless devices are not user serviceable. Do not modify them in any way.
Modification to a wireless device will void the authorization to use it.
Contact manufacturer for service.
Intentional emitter per FCC Part 15
Low power, Radio LAN devices (radio frequency (RF) wireless communication
devices), operating in the 2.4 GHz/5 GHz Band, may be present (embedded) in
your printer system. This section is only applicable if these devices are present.
Refer to the system label to verify the presence of wireless devices.
Wireless devices that may be in your system are only qualified for use in the
United States of America if an FCC ID number is on the system label.
5. Appendix
130
Regulatory information
FCC Statement for Wireless LAN use:
17
Germany only
While installing and operating this transmitter and antenna combination
the radio frequency exposure limit of 1m W/cm2 may be exceeded at
distances close to the antenna installed. Therefore, the user must maintain
a minimum distance of 20cm from the antenna at all times. This device
cannot be colocated with another transmitter and transmitting antenna.
16
Russia / Kazakhstan / Belarus only
18
Turkey only
19
Thailand only
5. Appendix
131
Regulatory information
20
21
Canada only
This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. / Le
present materiel est conforme aux specifications techniques applicables
d’Industrie Canada.
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is an indication of the maximum number
of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination of
an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the
requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices not exceed five. / L’indice
d’equivalence de la sonnerie (IES) sert a indiquer le nombre maximal de
terminaux qui peuvent etre raccordes a une interface telephonique. La
terminaison d’une interface peut consister en une combinaison quelconque de
dispositifs, a la seule condition que la somme d’indices d’equivalence de la
sonnerie de tous les dispositifs n’excede pas cinq.
Fax Branding
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any
person to use a computer or other electronic device to send any message via a
telephone facsimile machine unless such message clearly contains in a margin
at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the
transmission the following information:
1 the date and time of transmission
2 identification of either business, business entity or individual sending the
message; and
3 telephone number of either the sending machine, business, business entity
or individual.
The Telephone Company may make changes in its communications facilities,
equipment operations or procedures where such action is reasonably required
in the operation of its business and is not inconsistent with the rules and
regulations in FCC Part 68. If such changes can be reasonably expected to render
any customer terminal equipment incompatible with telephone company
communications facilities, or require modification or alteration of such terminal
equipment, or otherwise materially affect its use or performance, the customer
shall be given adequate notice in writing, to allow the customer an opportunity
to maintain uninterrupted service
5. Appendix
132
Regulatory information
22
FCC Regulations state that changes or modifications to this equipment not
expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the user’s authority to
operate this equipment. In the event that terminal equipment causes harm
to the telephone network, the telephone company should notify the
customer that service may be stopped. However, where prior notice is
impractical, the company may temporarily cease service, providing that
they:
Ringer Equivalence Number
The Ringer Equivalence Number and FCC Registration Number for this machine
may be found on the label located on the bottom or rear of the machine. In some
instances you may need to provide these numbers to the telephone company.
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is a measure of the electrical load placed
on the telephone line, and is useful for determining whether you have
“overloaded” the line. Installing several s of equipment on the same telephone
line may result in problems making and receiving telephone calls, especially
ringing when your line is called. The sum of all Ringer Equivalence Numbers of
the equipment on your telephone line should be less than five in order to assure
proper service from the telephone company. In some cases, a sum of five may
not be usable on your line. If any of your telephone equipment is not operating
properly, you should immediately remove it from your telephone line, as it may
cause harm to the telephone network.
The equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements
adopted by the ACTA. On the rear of this equipment is a label that contains,
among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX.
If requested, this number must be provided to the telephone company.
a promptly notify the customer.
b give the customer an opportunity to correct the equipment problem.
c inform the customer of the right to bring a complaint to the Federal
Communication Commission pursuant to procedures set out in FCC
Rules and Regulations Subpart E of Part 68.
You should also know that:
•
Your machine is not designed to be connected to a digital PBX system.
•
If you intend to use a computer modem or fax modem on the same phone
line as your machine, you may experience transmission and reception
problems with all the equipment. It is recommended that no other
equipment, except for a regular telephone, share the line with your
machine.
•
If your area experiences a high incidence of lightning or power surges, we
recommend that you install surge protectors for both the power and the
telephone lines. Surge protectors can be purchased from your dealer or
telephone and electronic specialty stores.
5. Appendix
133
Regulatory information
•
When programming emergency numbers and/or making test calls to
emergency numbers, use a non-emergency number to advise the
emergency service dispatcher of your intentions. The dispatcher will give
you further instructions on how to actually test the emergency number.
•
This machine may not be used on coin service or party lines.
•
This machine provides magnetic coupling to hearing aids.
You may safely connect this equipment to the telephone network by means of
a standard modular jack, USOC RJ-11C.
If you cut off the moulded plug, get rid of it straight away.
You cannot rewire the plug and you may receive an electric shock if you
plug it into a socket.
Important warning:
You must earth this machine.
23
Replacing the Fitted Plug (for UK Only)
The wires in the mains lead have the following color code:
• Green and Yellow: Earth
• Blue: Neutral
Important
The mains lead for this machine is fitted with a standard (BS 1363) 13 amp plug
and has a 13 amp fuse. When you change or examine the fuse, you must re-fit
the correct 13 amp fuse. You then need to replace the fuse cover. If you have lost
the fuse cover, do not use the plug until you have another fuse cover.
Contact the people from you purchased the machine.
The 13 amp plug is the most widely used in the UK and should be suitable.
However, some buildings (mainly old ones) do not have normal 13 amp plug
sockets. You need to buy a suitable plug adaptor. Do not remove the moulded
plug.
• Brown: Live
If the wires in the mains lead do not match the colors marked in your plug, do
the following:
You must connect the green and yellow wire to the pin marked by the letter “E”
or by the safety ‘Earth symbol’ or colored green and yellow or green.
You must connect the blue wire to the pin which is marked with the letter “N” or
colored black.
You must connect the brown wire to the pin which is marked with the letter “L”
or colored red.
You must have a 13 amp fuse in the plug, adaptor, or at the distribution board.
5. Appendix
134
Regulatory information
24
Declaration of conformity (European countries)
Approvals and Certifications
Hereby, Samsung Electronics, declares that this [Xpress M267xN,
Xpress M287xND] is incompliance with the essential requirements
and other relevantprovisions of Low Voltage Directive (2006/95/EC),
EMC Directive (2004/108/EC).
March 9, 1999: Council Directive 1999/5/EC on radio equipment and
telecommunications terminal equipment and the mutual recognition of their
conformity. A full declaration, defining the relevant Directives and referenced
standards can be obtained from your Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.
representative.
EC Certification
Certification to 1999/5/EC Radio Equipment & Telecommunications Terminal
Equipment Directive (FAX)
Hereby, Samsung Electronics, declares that this [Xpress M267xF,
Xpress M267xFH, Xpress M267xFN, Xpress M267xHN, Xpress
M287xFD, Xpress M287xHN, Xpress M287xDW, Xpress M287xFW,
Xpress M288xFW, Xpress M288xHW] is in compliance with the
essential requirements and other relevant provisions of R&TTE
Directive 1999/5/EC.
This Samsung product has been self-certified by Samsung for pan-European
single terminal connection to the analogue public switched telephone network
(PSTN) in accordance with Directive 1999/5/EC. The product has been designed
to work with the national PSTNs and compatible PBXs of the European
countries:
The declaration of conformity may be consulted at
www.samsung.com, go to Support > Download center and enter
your printer (MFP) name to browse the EuDoC.
In the event of problems, you should contact the Euro QA Lab of Samsung
Electronics Co., Ltd. in the first instance.
January 1, 1995: Council Directive 2006/95/EC Approximation of the laws of
the member states related to low voltage equipment.
January 1, 1996: Council Directive 2004/108/EC, approximation of the laws of
the Member States related to electromagnetic compatibility.
The product has been tested against TBR21. To assist in the use and application
of terminal equipment which complies with this standard, the European
Telecommunication Standards Institute (ETSI) has issued an advisory document
(EG 201 121) which contains notes and additional requirements to ensure
network compatibility of TBR21 terminals. The product has been designed
against, and is fully compliant with, all of the relevant advisory notes contained
in this document.
5. Appendix
135
Regulatory information
European radio approval information (for products
fitted with EU-approved radio devices)
25
Israel only
Low power, Radio LAN type devices (radio frequency (RF) wireless
communication devices), operating in the 2.4 GHz/5 GHz band, may be present
(embedded) in your printer system which is intended for home or office use. This
section is only applicable if these devices are present. Refer to the system label
to verify the presence of wireless devices.
26
Wireless devices that may be in your system are only
qualified for use in the European Union or associated
areas if a CE mark is on the system label.
The power output of the wireless device or devices that may be embedded in
you printer is well below the RF exposure limits as set by the European
Commission through the R&TTE directive.
European states qualified under wireless approvals:
EU countries
European states with restrictions on use:
EU
EEA/EFTA countries
Regulatory compliance statements
Wireless guidance
Low power, Radio LAN devices (radio frequency (RF) wireless communication
devices), operating in the 2.4 GHz/5 GHz Band, may be present (embedded) in
your printer system. The following section is a general overview of
considerations while operating a wireless device.
Additional limitations, cautions, and concerns for specific countries are listed in
the specific country sections (or country group sections). The wireless devices in
your system are only qualified for use in the countries identified by the Radio
Approval Marks on the system rating label. If the country you will be using the
wireless device in, is not listed, contact your local Radio Approval agency for
requirements. Wireless devices are closely regulated and use may not be
allowed.
No limitations at this time
5. Appendix
136
Regulatory information
The power output of the wireless device or devices that may be embedded in
your printer is well below the RF exposure limits as known at this time. Because
the wireless devices (which may be embedded into your printer) emit less
energy than is allowed in radio frequency safety standards and
recommendations, manufacturer believes these devices are safe for use.
Regardless of the power levels, care should be taken to minimize human contact
during normal operation.
As a general guideline, a separation of 20 cm (8 inches) between the wireless
device and the body, for use of a wireless device near the body (this does not
include extremities) is typical. This device should be used more than 20 cm (8
inches) from the body when wireless devices are on and transmitting.
This transmitter must not be collocated or operation in conjunction with any
other antenna or transmitter.
Some circumstances require restrictions on wireless devices. Examples of
common restrictions are listed below:
Radio frequency wireless communication can interfere with
equipment on commercial aircraft. Current aviation regulations
require wireless devices to be turned off while traveling in an airplane.
IEEE 802.11 (also known as wireless Ethernet) and Bluetooth
communication devices are examples of devices that provide wireless
communication.
In environments where the risk of interference to other devices or
services is harmful or perceived as harmful, the option to use a wireless
device may be restricted or eliminated. Airports, Hospitals, and
Oxygen or flammable gas laden atmospheres are limited examples
where use of wireless devices may be restricted or eliminated. When in
environments where you are uncertain of the sanction to use wireless
devices, ask the applicable authority for authorization prior to use or
turning on the wireless device.
Every country has different restrictions on the use of wireless devices.
Since your system is equipped with a wireless device, when traveling
between countries with your system, check with the local Radio
Approval authorities prior to any move or trip for any restrictions on
the use of a wireless device in the destination country.
If your system came equipped with an internal embedded wireless
device, do not operate the wireless device unless all covers and shields
are in place and the system is fully assembled.
Wireless devices are not user serviceable. Do not modify them in any
way. Modification to a wireless device will void the authorization to
use it. Contact manufacturer for service.
Only use drivers approved for the country in which the device will be
used. See the manufacturer System Restoration Kit, or contact
manufacturer Technical Support for additional information.
5. Appendix
137
Regulatory information
27
China only
᳝ᆇ⠽䋼
5. Appendix
138
Copyright
© 2013 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.
This user’s guide is provided for information purposes only. All information included herein is subject to change without notice.
Samsung Electronics is not responsible for any direct or indirect damages, arising from or related to use of this user’s guide.
•
Samsung and the Samsung logo are trademarks of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.
•
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows Server 2008 R2, Windows 10 and Windows Server 2016 are either registered trademarks
or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
•
iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, Mac and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S and other countries. AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks
of Apple Inc.
•
Google, Picasa, Google Cloud Print, Google Docs, Android and Gmail are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Google Inc.
•
Google Cloud Print is a trademark of Google Inc.
•
LaserWriter is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.
•
All other brand or product names are trademarks of their respective companies or organizations.
The software included in this product contains open source software. You may obtain the complete
corresponding source code for a period of three years after the last shipment of this product by sending an email
to mailto:oss.request@samsung.com. It is also possible to obtain the complete corresponding source code in a
physical medium such as a CD-ROM; a minimal charge will be required.
The following URL http://opensource.samsung.com/opensource/
Samsung_M267x_M287x_M288x_Series/seq/34 leads to the download page of the source code made
available and open source license information as related to this product. This offer is valid to anyone in
receipt of this information.
QR code
REV. 9.09
5. Appendix
139
Copyright
5. Appendix
140
User’s Guide
ADVANCED
ADVANCED
This guide provides information about installation, advanced configuration,
operation and troubleshooting on various OS environments.
Some features may not be available depending on models or countries.
BASIC
This guide provides information concerning installation, basic operation and troubleshooting
on Windows.
M267x series
M287x series
M288x series
ADVANCED
1. Software Installation
3. Useful Setting Menus
Installation for Mac
144
Before you begin reading a chapter
209
Reinstallation for Mac
145
Print menu
210
Installation for Linux
146
Copy menu
211
Reinstallation for Linux
147
Fax menu
214
System setup
217
2. Using a Network-Connected
Machine
4. Special Features
Useful network programs
149
Altitude adjustment
225
Wired network setup
150
Entering various characters
226
Installing driver over the network
153
Setting up the fax address book
228
IPv6 configuration
162
Printing features
231
Wireless network setup
165
Scan features
245
Samsung Mobile Print
196
Fax features
252
Using the NFC feature
197
AirPrint
203
Google Cloud Print™
205
141
ADVANCED
5. Useful Management Tools
Accessing management tools
262
Easy Capture Manager
263
Samsung AnyWeb Print
264
Easy Eco Driver
265
Using SyncThru™ Web Service
266
Using Samsung Easy Document Creator
269
Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager
270
Using Samsung Printer Status
273
Using Samsung Printer Experience
275
6. Troubleshooting
Paper feeding problems
282
Power and cable connecting problems
283
Printing problems
284
Printing quality problems
288
Copying problems
296
Scanning problems
297
Faxing problems
299
Operating system problems
301
142
1. Software Installation
This chapter provides instructions for installing essential and helpful software for use in an environment where the
machine is connected via a cable. A locally connected machine is a machine directly attached to your computer using
the cable. If your machine is attached to a network, skip the following steps below and go on to installing a network
connected machine’s driver (see "Installing driver over the network" on page 153).
• Installation for Mac
144
• Reinstallation for Mac
145
• Installation for Linux
146
• Reinstallation for Linux
147
• If you are a Windows OS user, refer to the Basic Guide for installing the machine’s driver (see
"Installing the driver locally" on page 29).
• Only use a USB cable no longer then 3 meter (118 inches).
Installation for Mac
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
10
Select USB Connected Printer on the Printer Connection Type and
click Continue.
2
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
11
Click Add Printer button to select your printer and add it to your printer
list.
If your machine supports fax, click Add Fax button to select your fax and
add it to your fax list
12
3
Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Mac desktop.
•
4
5
6
7
8
After the installation is finished, click Close.
For Mac OS X 10.8, double-click the CD-ROM that appears on Finder.
Double-click the MAC_Installer folder > Installer OS X icon.
Click Continue.
Read the license agreement and click Continue.
Click Agree to agree to the license agreement.
Click Install. All components necessary for machine operations will be
installed.
If you click Customize, you can choose individual components to install.
9
Enter the password and click OK.
1. Software Installation
144
Reinstallation for Mac
If the printer driver does not work properly, uninstall the driver and reinstall it.
1
Open the Applications folder > Samsung > Printer Software
Uninstaller.
2
3
4
5
To uninstall printer software, click Continue.
Check the program you want to delete and click Uninstall.
Enter the password and click OK.
After the uninstallation is finished, click Close.
If a machine has already been added, delete it from the Print Setup Utility
or Print & Fax.
1. Software Installation
145
Installation for Linux
You need to download the Linux software packages from the Samsung website
to install the printer software (http://www.samsung.com > find your product >
Support or Downloads).
1
Installing the Unified Linux Driver
8
9
10
11
When the installation is finished, launch printing utility(Go to System >
Administration > Printing or execute "system-config-printer"
command in Terminal program).
Click Add button.
Select your printer.
Click the Forward button and add it to your system.
You must log in as a super user (root) to install the machine software. If you
are not a super user, ask your system administrator.
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
2
3
Copy the Unified Linux Driver package to your system.
4
5
6
Extract the package.
7
Proceed with the installation.
Open Terminal program and go to the folder that you copied the
package to.
Move to uld folder.
Execute "./install.sh" command (If you're not logged in as a root, execute
the command with "sudo" as "sudo ./install.sh")
1. Software Installation
146
Reinstallation for Linux
If the printer driver does not work properly, uninstall the driver and reinstall it.
Open Terminal program.
1
2
3
Move to uld folder extracted from Unified Linux Driver package.
4
Proceed with the uninstallation.
Execute "./uninstall.sh" command (If you're not logged in as root,
execute the command with "sudo" as "sudo ./uninstall.sh")
1. Software Installation
147
2. Using a NetworkConnected Machine
This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for setting up a network connected machine and software.
• Useful network programs
149
• Wired network setup
150
• Installing driver over the network
153
• IPv6 configuration
162
• Wireless network setup
165
• Samsung Mobile Print
196
• Using the NFC feature
197
• AirPrint
203
• Google Cloud Print™
205
Supported optional devices and features may differ according to your model (see "Features by
model" on page 7).
Useful network programs
There are several programs available to setup the network settings easily in a
network environment. For the network administrator especially, managing
several machines on the network is possible.
• Before using the programs below, set the IP address first.
• Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on
model or country (see "Features by model" on page 7).
2
SyncThru™ Web Admin Service
Web-based machine management solution for network administrators.
SyncThru™ Web Admin Service provides you with an efficient way of managing
network devices and lets you remotely monitor and troubleshoot network
machines from any site with corporate internet access.
•
Download this program from http://solution.samsungprinter.com.
1
3
SyncThru™ Web Service
The web server embedded on your network machine allows you to do the
following tasks (see "Using SyncThru™ Web Service" on page 266).
•
Check the supplies information and status.
•
Customize machine settings.
•
Set the email notification option. When you set this option, the machine
status (toner cartridge shortage or machine error) will be sent to a certain
person's email automatically.
•
Configure the network parameters necessary for the machine to connect to
various network environments.
SetIP wired network setup
This utility program allows you to select a network interface and manually
configure the IP addresses for use with the TCP/IP protocol.
•
See "IPv4 configuration using SetIP (Windows)" on page 150.
•
See "IPv4 configuration using SetIP (Mac)" on page 151.
•
See "IPv4 configuration using SetIP (Linux)" on page 152.
• This feature is not available for the machine that does not support the
network interface (see "Rear view" on page 23).
• TCP/IPv6 is not supported by this program.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
149
Wired network setup
For example:
4
Printing a network configuration report
You can print Network Configuration Report from the machine’s control panel
that will show the current machine’s network settings. This will help you to set
up a network.
•
MAC Address: 00:15:99:41:A2:78
•
IP Address: 169.254.192.192
5
Setting IP address
• This feature is not available for the machine that does not support the
network interface (see "Rear view" on page 23).
• TCP/IPv6 is not supported by this program.
First, you have to set up an IP address for network printing and managements.
In most cases a new IP address will be automatically assigned by a DHCP
(Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server located on the network.
• Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Accessing the
menu" on page 33).
• It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for
some models.
•
The machine has the display screen: Press the
IPv4 configuration using SetIP (Windows)
Before using the SetIP program, disable the computer firewall from Control
Panel > Security Center > Windows Firewall.
(Menu) button on the
control panel and select Network > Network Conf.
The following instructions may differ for your model.
Using this Network Configuration Report, you can find your machine’s MAC
address and IP address.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
150
Wired network setup
1
2
3
4
5
Download the software from the Samsung website then unpack and
install it: (http://www.samsung.com > find your product > Support or
Downloads).
Follow the instructions in the installation window.
Before using the SetIP program, disable the computer firewall from System
Preferences > Security > Firewall.
Connect your machine to the network with a network cable.
The following instructions may vary from your model.
Turn on the machine.
From the Windows Start menu, select All Programs > Samsung
Printers > SetIP > SetIP.
6
Click the
icon (third from left) in the SetIP window to open the TCP/
IP configuration window.
7
Enter the machine’s new information into the configuration window. In
a corporate intranet, you may need to have this information assigned by
a network manager before proceeding.
Find the machine’s MAC address from the Network Configuration Report
(see "Printing a network configuration report" on page 150) and enter it
without the colons. For example, 00:15:99:29:51:A8 becomes
0015992951A8.
8
IPv4 configuration using SetIP (Mac)
Click Apply, and then click OK. The machine will automatically print the
Network Configuration Report. Confirm that all the settings are
correct.
1
2
Connect your machine to the network with a network cable.
3
Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Mac desktop.
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
•
4
5
6
7
For Mac OS X 10.8, Double-click the CD-ROM that appears on Finder.
Double-click the MAC_Installer folder > Installer OS X icon.
Click Continue.
Read the license agreement and click Continue.
Click Agree to agree to the license agreement.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
151
Wired network setup
8
Click Install. All components necessary for machine operations will be
installed.
IPv4 configuration using SetIP (Linux)
If you click Customize, you can choose individual components to install.
Before using the SetIP program, disable the computer firewall from System
Preferences or Administrator.
9
10
Enter the password and click OK.
11
Select Network Connected Printer(Wired or Wireless) on the Printer
Connection Type and click Set IP Address button.
12
13
The following instructions may vary from your model or operating systems.
When the message that warns that all applications will close on your
computer appears, click Continue.
Click the
icon (third from left) in the SetIP window to open the TCP/
IP configuration window.
Enter the machine’s new information into the configuration window. In
a corporate intranet, you may need to have this information assigned by
a network manager before proceeding.
1
2
Download the SetIP program from the Samsung web site and extract it.
3
4
Click to open the TCP/IP configuration window.
Find the machine’s MAC address from the Network Configuration Report
(see "Printing a network configuration report" on page 150) and enter it
without the colons. For example, 00:15:99:29:51:A8 becomes
0015992951A8.
14
Click Apply, and then click OK. The machine will automatically print the
Network Configuration Report. Confirm that all the settings are
correct.
Double-click the SetIPApplet.html file in cdroot/Linux/noarch/
at_opt/share/utils folder.
Enter the machine’s new information into the configuration window. In
a corporate intranet, you may need to have this information assigned by
a network manager before proceeding.
Find the machine’s MAC address from the Network Configuration Report
(see "Printing a network configuration report" on page 150) and enter it
without the colons. For example, 00:15:99:29:51:A8 becomes
0015992951A8.
5
The machine will automatically print the Network Configuration
Report.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
152
Installing driver over the network
• Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on
model or country (see "Features by model" on page 7).
2
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
• This feature is not available for the machine that does not support the
network interface (see "Rear view" on page 23).
•
You can install the printer driver and software when you insert the
software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
For Windows, select the printer driver and software in the Select
Software to Install window.
If the installation window does not appear, click Start > All programs >
Accessories > Run.
X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter, which represents your CDROM drive and click OK.
6
Windows
•
For Windows 8,
If the installation window does not appear, from Charms, select
Search > Apps and search for Run. Type in X:\Setup.exe, replacing
“X” with the letter that represents your CD-ROM drive and click OK.
The firewall software might be blocking network communication. efore
connecting the device to the network, disable the computer’s firewall.
If “Tap to choose what happens with this disc.” pop-up window
appears, click the window and select Run Setup.exe.
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to the network and powered
on. Also, your machine’s IP address should have been set (see "Setting IP
address" on page 150).
3
Review and accept the installation agreements in the installation
window. Then, click Next.
4
5
Select Network connection on the Printer Connection Type screen.
Follow the instructions in the installation window.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
153
Installing driver over the network
From the Windows 8 Start Screen
4
You can print a Network Configuration Report from the machine’s control
panel that will show the current machine’s host name (see "Printing a
network configuration report" on page 188).
• The V4 driver is automatically downloaded from the Windows Update if
your computer is connected to the Internet. If not, you can manually
download the V4 driver from Samsung website, http://
www.samsung.com > find your product > Support or downloads.
• You can download Samsung Printer Experience app from the
Windows Store. You need have a Microsoft account to use the Windows
Store.
a From Charms, select Search.
b Click Store.
c Search and click Samsung Printer Experience.
d Click Install.
Click the model name or host name you wish to use.
5
The driver is automatically installed from the Windows Update.
• If you install the driver using the supplied software CD, V4 driver is not
installed. If you want to use the V4 driver in the Desktop screen, you can
download from the Samsung website, http://www.samsung.com >find
your product > Support or downloads.
• If you want to install Samsung’s printer management tools, you need to
install them using the supplied software CD.
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to the network and powered
on. Also, your machine’s IP address should have been set (see "Setting IP
address" on page 150).
2
3
From Charms, select Settings > Change PC settings > Devices.
Click Add a device.
Discovered machines will be shown on the screen.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
154
Installing driver over the network
Silent installation Mode
Command- line
Silent installation mode is an installation method that does not require any user
intervention. Once you start the installation, the machine driver and software
are automatically installed on you computer. You can start the silent installation
by typing /s or /S in the command window.
Command-line Parameters
Following table shows commands that can be used in the command window.
Following command-line are effective and operated when command is
used with /s or /S. But /h, /H or /? are exceptional commands that can be
operated solely.
Command- line
/s or
/S
Definition
Starts silent installation.
Description
Installs machine drivers
without prompting any UIs
or user intervention.
/p”<port name>” or
Definition
Specifies printer port.
/P”<port name>”
Network Port will be
created by use of
Standard TCP/IP
Port monitor. For
local port, this port
must exist on
system before
being specified by
command.
Description
Printer port name can be
specified as IP address,
hostname, USB local port
name, IEEE1284 port name
or network path.
For example:
•
/p”xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx” in
where, “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”
means IP address for
network printer. /
p”USB001”, /P”LPT1:”, /
p”hostname”
• /
p"\\computer_name\sha
red_printer" or
"\\xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx\shared
_printer" in where,
"\\computer_name\shar
ed_printer" or
"\\xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx\shared
_printer" means the
network path to the
printer by entering two
slashes, the computer
name or local IP address
of the PC sharing the
printer, and then the
share name of the
printer.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
155
Installing driver over the network
Command- line
/a”<dest_path>” or
/A”<dest_path>”
Definition
Specifies destination path
for installation.
The destination
path should be a
fully qualified path.
Description
Since machine drivers
should be installed on the
OS specific location, this
command applies to only
application software.
Command- line
Definition
Description
Uses existing machine
driver files to create printer
instance if it is already
installed.
This command provides a
way to install a printer
instance that uses installed
printer driver files without
installing an additional
driver.
Removes only specified
printer instance and not the
driver files.
This command provides a
way to remove only
specified printer instance
from your system without
effecting other printer
drivers. It will not remove
printer driver files from your
system.
Uninstalls all device drivers
and applications from your
system.
This command will remove
all installed device drivers
and application software
from your system.
/v”<share name>” or Shares installed machine
and add other available
/V”<share name>”
platform drivers for Point &
Print.
It will install all supported
Windows OS platform’s
machine drivers to system
and share it with specified
<share name> for point and
print.
/x or
/X
/up”<printer
name>” or
/n”<Printer name>”
or
/N”<Printer name>”
/nd or
/ND
Specifies printer name.
Printer instance shall be
created as specified printer
name.
With this parameter, you
can add printer instances as
your wishes.
Commands not to set the
installed driver as a default
machine driver.
It indicates installed
machine driver will not be
the default machine driver
on your system if there are
one or more printer drivers
installed. If there is no
installed machine driver on
your system, then this
option won’t be applied
because Windows OS will
set installed printer driver as
a default machine driver.
/UP”<printer
name>”
/d or
/D
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
156
Installing driver over the network
7
Command- line
Definition
Description
/O
Opens Printers and Faxes
folder after installation.
This command will open
Printers and Faxes folder
after the silent installation.
/h, /H or /?
Shows Command-line Usage.
/o or
Mac
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to your network and powered
on.
2
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
3
Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Mac desktop.
•
4
5
6
7
8
For Mac OS X 10.8, double-click the CD-ROM that appears on Finder.
Double-click the MAC_Installer folder > Installer OS X icon.
Click Continue.
Read the license agreement and click Continue.
Click Agree to agree to the license agreement.
Click Install. All components necessary for machine operations will be
installed.
If you click Customize, you can choose individual components to install.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
157
Installing driver over the network
9
10
Enter the password and click OK.
Select Network Connected Printer(Wired or Wireless) on the Printer
Connection Type and click Continue.
11
Click Add Printer button to select your printer and add it to your printer
list.
12
13
14
Click IP and select HP Jetdirect - Socket in Protocol.
8
Linux
You need to download Linux software packages from the Samsung website to
install the printer software (http://www.samsung.com> find your product >
Support or Downloads).
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to your network and powered
on. Also, your machine’s IP address should have been set.
2
3
Copy the Unified Linux Driver package to your system.
4
5
6
Extract the package.
Enter the machine’s IP address in the Address input field.
Enter the queue name in the Queue input field. If you cannot determine
the queue name for your machine server, try using the default queue
first.
15
If Auto Select does not work properly, choose Select Printer Software
and your machine name in Print Using.
16
17
Click Add.
After the installation is finished, click Close.
Open Terminal program and go to the folder that you copied the
package to.
Move to uld folder.
Execute "./install.sh" command (If you're not logged in as root, execute
the command with "sudo" as "sudo ./install.sh")
7
8
Proceed with the installation.
9
Click the Add button.
When the installation is finished, launch Printing utility(Go to System >
Administration > Printing menu or execute "system-config-printer"
command in Terminal program).
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
158
Installing driver over the network
10
11
Select AppSocket/HP JetDirect and enter your machine's IP address.
2
“su -”
Click the Forward button and add it to your system.
3
9
UNIX
• Make sure your machine supports the UNIX operating system before
installing the UNIX printer driver (see "Operating System" on page 7).
To use the UNIX printer driver, you have to install the UNIX printer driver
package first, then setup the printer. You can download the UNIX printer driver
package from the Samsung website (http://www.samsung.com> find your
product > Support or Downloads).
4
1
From the Samsung website, download and unpack the UNIX Printer
Driver package to your computer.
Unpack the UNIX printer driver package.
For example, on IBM AIX, use the following commands.
“gzip -d < enter the package name | tar xf -”
5
6
Go to the unpacked directory.
Run the install script.
“./install –i”
install is the installer script file which is used to install or uninstall the
UNIX Printer Driver package.
Use “chmod 755 install” command to give the permission to the
installer script.
Installing the UNIX printer driver package
The installation procedure is common for all variants of UNIX OS mentioned.
Copy the appropriate driver archive to the target UNIX computer.
See administration guide of your UNIX OS for details.
• The commands are marked with “”, when typing the commands, do not
type “”.
• Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on
model or country (see "Operating System" on page 7).
Acquire root privileges.
7
8
Execute the “. /install –c” command to verify installation results.
Run “installprinter” from the command line. This will bring up the Add
Printer Wizard window. Setup the printer in this window referring to
the following procedures.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
159
Installing driver over the network
Setting up the printer
On some UNIX OS, for example on Solaris 10, just added printers may not be
enabled and/or may not accept jobs. In this case run the following two
commands on the root terminal:
“accept <printer_name>”
“enable <printer_name>”
Uninstalling the printer driver package
The utility should be used to delete the printer installed in the system.
a Run “uninstallprinter” command from the terminal.
It will open the Uninstall Printer Wizard.
The installed printers are listed in the drop-down list.
b Select the printer to be deleted.
c Click Delete to delete the printer from the system.
d Execute the “. /install –d” command to uninstall the whole package.
e To verify removal results, execute the “. /install –c” command.
To add the printer to your UNIX system, run ‘installprinter’ from the command
line. This will bring up the Add Printer Wizard window. Setup the printer in this
window according to the following steps:
1
2
3
Type the name of the printer.
4
5
6
Specify any printer description in the Description field. This is optional.
7
To re-install it, use the command “. /install –i” to reinstall the binaries.
8
9
10
Select the appropriate printer model from the model list.
Enter any description corresponding to the type of the printer in the
Type field. This is optional.
Specify the printer location in the Location field.
Type the IP address or DNS name of the printer in the Device textbox for
network-connected printers. On IBM AIX with jetdirect Queue type,
only the DNS name is possible-numeric IP address is not allowed.
Queue type shows the connection as lpd or jetdirect in the
corresponding list box. Additionally, usb type is available on Sun Solaris
OS.
Select Copies to set the number of copies.
Check the Collate option to receive copies already sorted.
Check the Reverse Order option to receive copies in the reverse order.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
160
Installing driver over the network
11
12
Check the Make Default option to set this printer as default.
Click OK to add the printer.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
161
IPv6 configuration
10
IPv6 is supported properly only in Windows Vista or higher.
• Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on
model or country (see "Features by model" on page 7 or "Menu
overview" on page 33).
From the control panel
Activating IPv6
• Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Accessing the
menu" on page 33).
• If the IPv6 network seems to not be working, set all the network setting
to the factory defaults and try again using Clear Setting.
• It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for
some models.
The machine supports the following IPv6 addresses for network printing and
managements.
•
Link-local Address: Self-configured local IPv6 address (Address starts with
FE80).
•
Stateless Address: Automatically configured IPv6 address by a network
router.
•
Stateful Address: IPv6 address configured by a DHCPv6 server.
•
Manual Address: Manually configured IPv6 address by a user.
In the IPv6 network environment, follow the next procedure to use the IPv6
address.
1
Select
(Menu) > Network > TCP/IP (IPv6) > IPv6 Activate on the
control panel.
2
3
Select On and press OK.
Turn the machine off and turn it on again.
When you install the printer driver, do not configure both IPv4 and IPv6. We
recommend to configure either IPv4 or IPv6.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
162
IPv6 configuration
DHCPv6 address configuration
11
From the SyncThru™ Web Service
If you have a DHCPv6 server on your network, you can set one of the following
options for default dynamic host configuration.
• Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Accessing the
menu" on page 33).
Activating IPv6
1
Access a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows. Enter
the machine IP address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address field and
press the Enter key or click Go.
2
If it’s your first time logging into SyncThru™ Web Service you need to
log-in as an administrator. Type in the below default ID and password.
We recommend you to change the default password for security
reasons.
• It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for
some models.
1
Select
(Menu) > Network > TCP/IP (IPv6) > DHCPv6 Config on the
control panel.
2
Press OK to select the required value you want.
•
ID: admin
•
DHCPv6 Addr.: Always use DHCPv6 regardless of router request.
•
Password: sec00000
•
DHCPv6 Off: Never use DHCPv6 regardless of router request.
•
Router: Use DHCPv6 only when requested by a router.
3
When the SyncThru™ Web Service window opens, move the mouse
cursor over the Settings of the top menu bar and then click Network
Settings.
4
5
6
7
Click TCP/IPv6 on the left pane of the website.
Check the IPv6 Protocol check box to activate IPv6.
Click the Apply button.
Turn the machine off and turn it on again.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
163
IPv6 configuration
• You can also set the DHCPv6.
Address must be enclosed in '[ ]' brackets.
• To manually set the IPv6 address:
Check the Manual Address check box. Then, the Address/Prefix text
box is activated. Enter the rest of the address
(e.g.,:3FFE:10:88:194::AAAA. “A” is the hexadecimal 0 through 9, A
through F).
IPv6 address configuration
1
Start a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, that supports IPv6
addressing as a URL.
2
Select one of the IPv6 addresses (Link-local Address, Stateless
Address, Stateful Address, Manual Address) from Network
Configuration Report (see "Printing a network configuration report" on
page 150).
3
•
Link-local Address: Self-configured local IPv6 address (Address
starts with FE80).
•
Stateless Address: Automatically configured IPv6 address by a
network router.
•
Stateful Address: IPv6 address configured by a DHCPv6 server.
•
Manual Address: Manually configured IPv6 address by a user.
Enter the IPv6 addresses (e.g.,: http://[FE80::215:99FF:FE66:7701]).
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
164
Wireless network setup
• Make sure your machine supports wireless networking. Wireless
networking may not be available depending on the model (see "Features
by model" on page 7).
• If the IPv6 network seems to not be working, set all the network settings
to the factory defaults and try again using Clear Setting.
Wireless network name and network password
Wireless networks require higher security, so when an access point is first set up,
a network name (SSID), the type of security used, and a Network Password are
created for the network. Ask your network administrator about this information
before proceeding with the machine installation.
12
Getting started
Understanding your network type
Typically, you can only have one connection between your computer and the
machine at a time.
Infrastructure mode
This is an environment generally used for homes and SOHOs
(Small Office/ Home Office). This mode uses an access point to
communicate with the wireless machine.
Ad hoc mode
This mode does not use an access point. The wireless
computer and wireless machine communicate directly.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
165
Wireless network setup
13
Introducing wireless set up methods
You can set wireless settings either from the machine or the computer. Choose the setting method from the below table.
Some wireless network installation types may not be available depending on the model or country.
Set up method
Connecting method
From the computer
Description & Reference
Windows user, see "Access point via USB cable" on page 171.
Windows user, see "Access point without a USB cable (recommended)" on page 174.
• Mac user, see "Access point via USB cable" on page 179.
• Mac user, see "Access point without a USB cable (recommended)" on page 182.
With Access Point
See "Using a network cable" on page 187.
From the machine’s control panel
See "Machines with a display screen" on page 169.
See "Using the menu button" on page 170.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
166
Wireless network setup
Set up method
Connecting method
From the computer
Description & Reference
Windows user, see "Ad hoc via USB cable" on page 176.
Mac user, see "Ad hoc via USB cable" on page 184.
Without Access Point
Wi-Fi Direct setup
See "Setting the Wi-Fi Direct for mobile printing" on page 190.
• If problems occur during wireless set up or driver installation, refer to the troubleshooting chapter (see "Troubleshooting for wireless network" on page 192).
• It is strongly recommended that you set the password on Access Points. If you do not set the password on Acess Points, they might be exposed to illegal access
from unknown machine including PCs, smart phones and printers. Refer to the Access Point user guide for password settings.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
167
Wireless network setup
Choosing your type
14
Using the WPS button
There are two methods available to connect your machine to a wireless network
If your machine and an access point (or wireless router) support Wi-Fi Protected
Setup™ (WPS), you can easily configure the wireless network settings by
pressing the
(WPS) button on the control panel without a computer.
• If you want to use the wireless network using the infrastructure mode,
make sure that the network cable is disconnected from the machine.
Using the WPS (PBC) button or entering the PIN from the computer to
connect to the access point (or wireless router) varies depending on the
access point (or wireless router) you are using. Refer to the user's guide
of the access point (or wireless router) you are using.
• When using the WPS button to set the wireless network, security settings
may change. To prevent this, lock the WPS option for the current wireless
security settings. The option name may differ depending on the access
point (or wireless router) you are using.
using the
(WPS) button on the control panel.
The Push Button Configuration (PBC) method allows you to connect your
machine to a wireless network by pressing both the
(WPS) button on the
control panel of your machine and the WPS (PBC) button on a Wi-Fi Protected
Setup™ WPS-enabled access point (or wireless router) respectively.
The Personal Identification Number (PIN) method helps you connect your
machine to a wireless network by entering the supplied PIN information on a WiFi Protected Setup™ WPS-enabled access point (or wireless router).
Factory default in your machine is PBC mode, which is recommended for a
typical wireless network environment.
You can change the WPS mode from the control panel
Network > Wireless > OK> WPS Setting).
(Menu) >
Items to prepare
•
Check if the access point (or wireless router) supports Wi-Fi Protected
Setup™ (WPS).
•
Check if your machine supports Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ (WPS).
•
Networked computer (PIN mode only)
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
168
Wireless network setup
Machines with a display screen
1
Connecting in PBC mode
1
Connecting in PIN mode
Or press and hold the
than 2 seconds.
Select
(Menu) > Network > Wireless > WPS Setting > PBC on the
control panel.
Or press and hold the
than 2 seconds.
(WPS) button on the control panel for more
2
The eight-digit PIN appears on the display.
The messages are displayed on the display screen in the order below:
Press the WPS (PBC) button on the access point (or wireless router).
a Connecting: The machine is connecting to the wireless network.
The messages are displayed on the display screen in the order below:
b Connected: When the machine is successfully connected to the
wireless network, the WPS LED light stays on.
a Connecting: The machine is connecting to the access point (or
wireless router).
b Connected: When the machine is successfully connected to the
wireless network, the WPS LED light stays on.
c AP SSID: After completing the wireless network connection process,
the AP’s SSID information appears on the display.
3
(WPS) button on the control panel for more
You need to enter the eight-digit PIN within two minutes on the
computer that is connected to the access point (or wireless router).
The machine starts waiting for up to two minutes until you press the WPS
(PBC) button on the access point (or wireless router).
2
Select
(Menu) > Network > Wireless > WPS Setting > PIN on the
control panel.
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive, and follow the
instructions in the window to set up the wireless network.
c SSID Type: After completing the wireless network connection
process, the AP’s SSID information is displayed on the LCD display.
3
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive, and follow the
instructions in the window to set up the wireless network.
Re-connecting to a network
When the wireless function is off, the machine automatically tries to re-connect
to the access point (or wireless router) with the previously used wireless
connection settings and address.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
169
Wireless network setup
15
In the following cases, the machine automatically re-connects to the
wireless network:
Using the menu button
• The machine is turned off and on again.
• The access point (or wireless router) is turned off and on again.
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Features by model"
on page 7).
Canceling the connection process
To cancel the wireless network connection when the machine is connecting to
the wireless network, press and release the
(Stop/Clear) on the control
panel. You need to wait 2 minutes to re-connect to the wireless network.
Before starting, you will need to know the network name (SSID) of your wireless
network and the network key if it is encrypted. This information was set when
the access point (or wireless router) was installed. If you do not know about your
wireless environment, please ask the person who set up your network.
After completing the wireless network connection, you need to install a
machine driver to print from an application (see "Installing driver over the
network" on page 153).
Disconnecting from a network
To disconnect the wireless network connection, press the
the control panel for more than two seconds.
(WPS) button on
•
When the Wi-Fi network is in idle mode: The machine is immediately
disconnected from the wireless network and the WPS LED turns off.
•
When the Wi-Fi network is being used: While the machine waits until the
current job is finished, the light blinks fast on the WPS LED. Then, the
wireless network connection is automatically disconnected and the WPS
LED turns off.
1
Select
(Menu) > Network > Wireless > WLAN Settings on the
control panel.
2
Press the OK to select the setup method you want.
•
Wizard (recommended): In this mode, the setup is automatic. The
machine will display a list of available networks from which to
choose. After a network is chosen then printer will prompt for the
corresponding security key.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
170
Wireless network setup
•
Custom: In this mode, users can give or edit manually their own
SSID, or choose the security option in detail.
16
Setup using Windows
Creating the infrastructure network
1
2
3
Check wheter the USB cable is connected to the machine.
Turn on your computer, access point, and machine.
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
Shortcut to the Samsung Easy Wireless Setup program without the CD: If
you have installed the printer driver once, you can access the Samsung
Easy Wireless Setup program without the CD (see "Accessing
management tools" on page 262).
If the installation window does not appear, click Start > All programs >
Accessories > Run.
Access point via USB cable
Items to prepare
X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter, which represents your CDROM drive and click OK.
•
Access point
•
•
Network-connected computer
•
Software CD that was provided with your machine
•
A machine installed with a wireless network interface
•
USB cable
For Windows 8,
If the installation window does not appear, from Charms, select
Search > Apps and search for Run. Type in X:\Setup.exe, replacing
“X” with the letter that represents your CD-ROM drive and click OK.
If “Tap to choose what happens with this disc.” pop-up window
appears, click the window and select Run Setup.exe.
4
Review and accept the installation agreements in the installation
window. Then, click Next.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
171
Wireless network setup
5
Select Wireless network connection on the Printer Connection Type
screen. Then, click Next.
6
On the Are you setting up your printer for the first time? screen, select
Yes, I will set up my printer's wireless network. Then, click Next.
7
Select Using a USB cable on the Select the Wireless Setup Method
screen. Then, click Next.
If your printer is already connected on the network, select No, my
printer is already connected to my network.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
172
Wireless network setup
8
After searching, the window shows the wireless network devices. Select
the name (SSID) of the access point you want to use and click Next.
The wireless network security window appears when the access point has
security settings.
Enter the Network Password of the access point (or router).
If you cannot find the network name you want to choose, or if you want to
set the wireless configuration manually, click Advanced Setting.
• Enter the wireless Network Name: Enter the SSID of the access point
(SSID is case-sensitive).
• Operation Mode: Select Infrastructure.
• Authentication: Select an authentication type.
Open System: Authentication is not used, and encryption may or may
not be used, depending on the need for data security.
Shared Key: Authentication is used. A device that has a proper WEP key
can access the network.
WPA Personal or WPA2 Personal: Select this option to authenticate the
print server based on a WPA Pre-Shared Key. This uses a shared secret key
(generally called Pre Shared Key pass phrase), which is manually
configured on the access point and each of its clients.
9
If your printer supports Wi-Fi Direct and this function is disabled, its
corresponding screen will appear.
Click OK and Next.
• Encryption: Select the encryption (None, WEP64, WEP128, TKIP, AES,
TKIP AES).
• Network Password: Enter the encryption network password value.
• Confirm Network Password: Confirm the encryption network
password value.
• WEP Key Index: If you are using WEP Encryption, select the appropriate
WEP Key Index.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
173
Wireless network setup
Creating the infrastructure network
• Wi-Fi Direct option appears on the screen only if your printer supports
this feature.
• Can start to build Wi-Fi Direct by using Samsung Easy Printer Manager
(see "Setting up Wi-Fi Direct" on page 191).
• Wi-Fi Direct Name: The default Wi-Fi Direct Name is the model name
and the maximum length is 22 characters.
1
2
Turn on your computer, access point, and machine.
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
• Password setting is the numeric string, and the size is 8 ~ 64 characters.
10
When the wireless network set up is completed, disconnect the USB
cable between the computer and machine. Click Next.
11
Follow the instructions in the installation window.
If the installation window does not appear, click Start > All programs >
Accessories > Run.
X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter, which represents your CDROM drive and click OK.
Access point without a USB cable (recommended)
•
If the installation window does not appear, from Charms, select
Search > Apps and search for Run. Type in X:\Setup.exe, replacing
“X” with the letter that represents your CD-ROM drive and click OK.
Items to prepare
•
WiFi-enabled PC running Windows 7 or higher and an access point (router)
•
Software CD that was provided with your machine
•
A machine installed with a wireless network interface
If “Tap to choose what happens with this disc.” pop-up window
appears, click the window and select Run Setup.exe.
3
While setting the wireless network, the machine uses PC’s wireless LAN. You
might not be able to connect to the Internet.
For Windows 8,
Review and accept the installation agreements in the installation
window. Then, click Next.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
174
Wireless network setup
4
Select Wireless network connection on the Printer Connection Type
screen. Then, click Next.
5
On the Are you setting up your printer for the first time? screen, select
Yes, I will set up my printer's wireless network. Then, click Next.
6
Select Using a direct wireless connection on the Select the Wireless
Setup Method screen. Then, click Next.
If your printer is already connected on the network, select No, my
printer is already connected to my network.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
175
Wireless network setup
Ad hoc via USB cable
Even if your computer is running Windows 7 or hight, you cannot use this
feature if your PC does not support wireless network. Set the wireless
network using a USB cable (see "Access point via USB cable" on page 171).
If below screen appears, press the
panel within 2 minutes.
7
8
(WPS) button from the control
If you do not have an access point (AP), you may still connect the machine
wirelessly to your computer by setting up an ad-hoc wireless network by
following the simple steps below.
Items to prepare
•
Network-connected computer
•
Software CD that was provided with your machine
•
A machine installed with a wireless network interface
•
USB cable
When the wireless network set up is completed, click Next.
Follow the instructions in the installation window.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
176
Wireless network setup
Creating the ad hoc network in Windows
1
2
4
Select Wireless network connection on the Printer Connection Type
screen. Then, click Next.
5
On the Are you setting up your printer for the first time? screen, select
Yes, I will set up my printer's wireless network. Then, click Next.
Turn on your computer and the wireless network machine.
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
If the installation window does not appear, click Start > All programs >
Accessories > Run.
X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter, which represents your CDROM drive and click OK.
•
For Windows 8,
If the installation window does not appear, from Charms, select
Search > Apps and search for Run. Type in X:\Setup.exe, replacing
“X” with the letter that represents your CD-ROM drive and click OK.
If “Tap to choose what happens with this disc.” pop-up window
appears, click the window and select Run Setup.exe.
3
If your printer is already connected on the network, select No, my
printer is already connected to my network.
6
Select Using a USB cable on the Select the Wireless Setup Method
screen. Then, click Next.
Review and accept the installation agreements in the installation
window. Then, click Next.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
177
Wireless network setup
7
After searching the wireless networks, a list of wireless networks your
machine has searched appears. Click Advanced Setting.
• Enter the wireless Network Name: Enter the SSID name you want (SSID
is case-sensitive).
• Operation Mode: Select ad hoc.
• Channel: Select the channel. (Auto Setting or 2412 MHz to 2467 MHz).
• Authentication: Select an authentication type.
Open System: Authentication is not used, and encryption may or may
not be used, depending on the need for data security.
Shared Key: Authentication is used. A device that has a proper WEP key
can access the network.
• Encryption: Select the encryption (None, WEP64, WEP128).
• Network Password: Enter the encryption network password value.
• Confirm Network Password: Confirm the encryption network
password value.
• WEP Key Index: If you are using WEP Encryption, select the appropriate
WEP Key Index.
The wireless network security window appears when the ad hoc network
has security enabled.
Select Open System or Shared Key for the authentication and click Next.
• WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) is a security protocol preventing
unauthorized access to your wireless network. WEP encrypts the data
portion of each packet exchanged on a wireless network using a 64-bit
or 128-bit WEP encryption key.
8
The window showing the wireless network setting appears. Check the
settings and click Next.
Before entering the IP address for the machine, you must know the
computer’s network configuration information. If the computer’s network
configuration is set to DHCP, the wireless network setting should also be
DHCP. Likewise, if the computer’s network configuration is set to Static, the
wireless network setting should also be Static.
If your computer is set to DHCP and you want to use the Static wireless
network setting, you must contact the network administrator to get the
static IP address.
• For the DHCP method
If the IP address assignment method is DHCP, check if DHCP is shown in
the Wireless Network Setting Confirm window. If it shows Static, click
Change TCP/IP to change the assignment method to Receive IP
address automatically (DHCP).
• For the Static method
If the IP address assignment method is Static, check if Static is shown in
the Wireless Network Setting Confirm window. If it shows DHCP, click
Change TCP/IP to enter the IP address and other network configuration
values for the machine.
For example,
If the computer’s network information is as shown follows:
- IP address: 169.254.133.42
- Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0
Then, the machine’s network information should be as below:
- IP address: 169.254.133.43
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
178
Wireless network setup
- Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 (Use the computer’s subnet mask.)
17
Setup using Mac
- Gateway: 169.254.133.1
9
10
The Wireless Network Setting Complete window appears. Click Next.
When the wireless network settings are completed, disconnect the USB
cable between the computer and machine. Click Next.
Items to prepare
11
Follow the instructions in the installation window.
•
Access point
•
Network-connected printer
•
Software CD that was provided with your machine
•
A machine installed with a wireless network interface
•
USB cable
Access point via USB cable
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
2
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
179
Wireless network setup
3
Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Mac desktop.
•
4
5
6
7
8
For Mac OS X 10.8, double-click the CD-ROM that appears on Finder.
10
Select Configuration of Wireless network on the Printer Connection
Type and click Continue.
Double-click the MAC_Installer folder > Installer OS X icon.
Click Continue.
Read the license agreement and click Continue.
Click Agree to agree to the license agreement.
Click Install. All components necessary for machine operations will be
installed.
If you click Customize, you can choose individual components to install.
9
Enter the password and click OK.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
180
Wireless network setup
11
If Wireless Settings screen appears, select Using a USB cable and click
Next.
12
After searching, the window shows the wireless network devices. Select
the name (SSID) of the access point you want to use and click Next.
If the screen does not appear, go to step 15.
When you set the wireless configuration manually, click Advanced Setting.
• Enter the wireless Network Name: Enter the SSID of the access point
(SSID is case-sensitive).
• Operation Mode: Select Infrastructure.
• Authentication: Select an authentication type.
Open System: Authentication is not used, and encryption may or may
not be used, depending on the need for data security.
Shared Key: Authentication is used. A device that has a proper WEP key
can access the network.
WPA Personal or WPA2 Personal: Select this option to authenticate the
print server based on the WPA Pre-Shared Key. This uses a shared secret
key (generally called Pre Shared Key pass phrase) that is manually
configured on the access point and each of its clients.
• Encryption: Select the encryption. (None, WEP64, WEP128, TKIP, AES,
TKIP, AES)
• Network Password: Enter the encryption network password value.
• Confirm Network Password: Confirm the encryption network
password value.
• WEP Key Index: If you are using WEP Encryption, select the appropriate
WEP Key Index.
The wireless network security window appears when the access point has
security enabled.
Enter the Network Password of the access point (or router).
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
181
Wireless network setup
13
The window showing the wireless network setting appears. Check the
settings and click Next.
• Wi-Fi Direct option appears on the screen only if your printer supports
this feature.
• Can start to build Wi-Fi Direct by using Samsung Easy Printer Manager
(see "Setting up Wi-Fi Direct" on page 191).
• Wi-Fi Direct Name: The default Wi-Fi Direct Name is the model name
and the maximum length is 22 characters.
• Password setting is the numeric string, and the size is 8 ~ 64 characters.
Access point without a USB cable (recommended)
Items to prepare
•
WiFi-enabled Mac running Mac OS 10.7 or higher and an access point
(router)
•
Software CD that was provided with your machine
•
A machine installed with a wireless network interface
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
14
15
The Wireless Network Setting Complete window appears. Click Next.
When the wireless network settings are completed, disconnect the USB
cable between the computer and machine. Click Next.
2
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
3
Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Mac desktop.
•
4
5
For Mac OS X 10.8, double-click the CD-ROM that appears on Finder.
Double-click the MAC_Installer folder > Installer OS X icon.
Click Continue.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
182
Wireless network setup
6
7
8
Read the license agreement and click Continue.
Click Agree to agree to the license agreement.
11
If Wireless Settings screen appears, select Using a direct wireless
connection and click Next.
If the screen does not appear, go to step 13.
Click Install. All components necessary for machine operations will be
installed.
If you click Customize, you can choose individual components to install.
9
10
Enter the password and click OK.
Select Configuration of Wireless network on the Printer Connection
Type and click Continue.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
183
Wireless network setup
Ad hoc via USB cable
If below screen appears, press the
within 2 minutes.
(WPS) button from the control panel
If you do not have an access point (AP), you may still connect the machine
wirelessly to your computer by setting up an ad hoc wireless network by
following these simple directions.
Items to prepare
•
Network-connected computer
•
Software CD that was provided with your machine
•
A machine installed with a wireless network interface
•
USB cable
Creating the ad hoc network in Mac
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
12
13
When the wireless network set up is completed, click Next.
2
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
After the installation is finished, click Close.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
184
Wireless network setup
3
Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Mac desktop.
•
4
5
6
7
8
For Mac OS X 10.8, double-click the CD-ROM that appears on Finder.
10
Select Configuration of Wireless network on the Printer Connection
Type and click Continue.
Double-click the MAC_Installer folder > Installer OS X icon.
Click Continue.
Read the license agreement and click Continue.
Click Agree to agree to the license agreement.
Click Install. All components necessary for machine operations will be
installed.
If you click Customize, you can choose individual components to install.
9
Enter the password and click OK.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
185
Wireless network setup
11
After searching the wireless networks, a list of wireless networks your
machine has searched appears. Click Advanced Setting.
• Enter the wireless Network Name: Enter the SSID name (SSID is casesensitive).
• Operation Mode: Select ad hoc.
• Channel: Select the channel (Auto Setting or 2412 MHz to 2467 MHz).
• Authentication: Select an authentication type.
Open System: Authentication is not used, and encryption may or may
not be used, depending on the need for data security.
Shared Key: Authentication is used. A device that has a proper WEP key
can access the network.
• Encryption: Select the encryption (None, WEP64, WEP128).
• Network Password: Enter the encryption network password value.
• Confirm Network Password: Confirm the encryption network
password value.
• WEP Key Index: If you are using WEP Encryption, select the appropriate
WEP Key Index.
The wireless network security window appears when the ad hoc network
has security setting.
Select Open System or Shared Key for the authentication and click Next.
• WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) is a security protocol preventing
unauthorized access to your wireless network. WEP encrypts the data
portion of each packet exchanged on a wireless network using a 64-bit
or 128-bit WEP encryption key.
12
The window showing the wireless network settings appears. Check the
settings and click Next.
Before entering the IP address for the machine, you must know the
computer’s network configuration information. If the computer’s network
configuration is set to DHCP, the wireless network setting should also be
DHCP. Likewise, if the computer’s network configuration is set to Static, the
wireless network setting should also be Static.
If your computer is set to DHCP and you want to use Static wireless network
setting, you must contact the network administrator to get the static IP
address.
• For the DHCP method
If the IP address assignment method is DHCP, check if DHCP is shown in
the Wireless Network Setting Confirm window. If it shows Static, click
Change TCP/IP to change the assignment method to Receive IP
address automatically (DHCP).
• For the Static method
If the IP address assignment method is Static, check if Static is shown in
the Wireless Network Setting Confirm window. If it shows DHCP, click
Change TCP/IP to enter the IP address and other network configuration
values for the machine.
For example,
If the computer’s network information is shown as follows:
- IP address: 169.254.133.42
- Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0
Then, the machine’s network information should be as shown below:
- IP address: 169.254.133.43
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
186
Wireless network setup
- Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 (Use the computer’s subnet mask.)
18
Using a network cable
- Gateway: 169.254.133.1
13
When the window that tells you that the network cable connection is
confirmed appears, disconnect the network cable and click Next.
Machines that do not support the network port will not be able to use this
feature (see "Rear view" on page 23).
If the network cable is connected, it may have trouble finding the
machine when configuring the wireless network.
14
15
The wireless network connects according to the network configuration.
Your machine is a network compatible machine. To enable your machine to
work with your network, you will need to perform some configuration
procedures.
Wireless network set up is completed. After installation is finished, click
Quit.
• After completing the wireless network connection, you need to install a
machine driver to print from an application (see "Installing driver over
the network" on page 153).
After completing the wireless network connection, you need to install a
machine driver to print from an application (see "Installation for Mac" on
page 144).
• See your network administrator, or the person that set up your wireless
network, for information about your network configuration.
Items to prepare
•
Access point
•
Network-connected computer
•
Software CD that was provided with your machine
•
A machine installed with a wireless network interface
•
Network cable
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
187
Wireless network setup
Printing a network configuration report
Using SyncThru™ Web Service
You can identify the network settings of your machine by printing a network
configuration report.
Before starting wireless parameter configuration, check the cable connection
status.
See "Printing a network configuration report" on page 150.
IP setting using SetIP Program (Windows)
1
Check whether or not the network cable is connected to the machine. If
not, connect the machine with a standard network cable.
2
Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer, Safari, or Firefox and enter
your machine’s new IP address in the browser window.
This program is used to manually set the network IP address of your machine
using its MAC address to communicate with the machine. The MAC address is
the hardware serial number of the network interface and can be found in the
Network Configuration Report.
See "Setting IP address" on page 150.
Configuring the machine’s wireless network
Before starting you will need to know the network name (SSID) of your wireless
network and the network key if it is encrypted. This information was set when
the access point (or wireless router) was installed. If you do not know about your
wireless environment, please ask the person who set up your network.
For example,
3
4
Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru™ Web Service website.
Type in the ID and Password then click Login. We recommend you to
change the default password for security reasons.
•
ID: admin
•
Password: sec00000
5
When the SyncThru™ Web Service window opens, click Network
Settings.
6
Click Wireless > Wizard.
To configure wireless parameters, you can use SyncThru™ Web Service.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
188
Wireless network setup
Wizard will help you setup the wireless network configuration. However, if
you want to set the wireless network directly, select Custom.
7
9
Disconnect the network cable (standard or network). Your machine should
then start communicating wirelessly with the network. In case of Ad-hoc
mode, you can use a wireless LAN and wired LAN simultaneously.
Select the one Network Name(SSID) in the list.
•
•
SSID: SSID (Service Set Identifier) is a name that identifies a wireless
network, access points, and wireless devices attempting to connect
to a specific wireless network must use the same SSID. The SSID is
case sensitive.
The confirmation window appears, please check your wireless setup. If
the setup is right, click Apply.
10
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive, and follow the
instructions in the window to set up the wireless network.
Operation Mode: Operation Mode refers to the type of wireless
connections (see "Wireless network name and network password"
on page 165).
-
Ad-hoc: Allows wireless devices to communicate directly with
each other in a peer-to-peer environment.
-
Infrastructure: Allows wireless devices to communicate with
each other through an access point.
If your network’s Operation Mode is Infrastructure, select the SSID of the
access point. If the Operation Mode is Ad-hoc, select the machine’s SSID.
8
Click Next.
If the wireless security setting window appears, enter the registered
password (network password) and click Next.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
189
Wireless network setup
6
19
Turning the Wi-Fi network on/off
Click Wireless > Custom.
You can also turn the Wi-Fi network on/off.
20
If your machine has a display, you can also turn on/off the Wi-Fi from the
machine’s control panel using the Network menu.
1
Check whether the network cable is connected to the machine. If not,
connect the machine with a standard network cable.
2
Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer, Safari, or Firefox and enter
your machine’s new IP address in the browser window.
For example,
3
4
5
Setting the Wi-Fi Direct for mobile printing
Wi-Fi Direct is an easy-to-setup peer-to-peer connection method between the
Wi-Fi Direct certified printer and a mobile device that provides a secure
connection and better throughput than ad hoc mode.
With Wi-Fi Direct, you can connect your printer to a Wi-Fi Direct network while
concurrently connecting to an access point. You can also use a wired network
and a Wi-Fi Direct network simultaneously so multiple users can access and print
documents both from Wi-Fi Direct and from a wired network.
Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru™ Web Service website.
• You cannot connect your mobile device to the internet through the
printer’s Wi-Fi Direct.
Type in the ID and Password, then click Login. We recommend you to
change the default password for security reasons.
• The supported protocol list may differ from your model, Wi-Fi Direct
networks do NOT support IPv6, network filtering, IPSec, WINS, and SLP
services.
•
ID: admin
• The maximum number of devices that can be connected via Wi-Fi Direct
is 3.
•
Password: sec00000
When the SyncThru™ Web Service window opens, click Network
Settings.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
190
Wireless network setup
Setting up Wi-Fi Direct
-
You can enable Wi-Fi Direct feature by one of the following methods.
Network Password: If your printer is a Group Owner, a Network
Password is required for other mobile devices to connect to your
printer. You can configure a network password yourself, or can
remember the given Network Password that is randomly generated by
default.
From the USB cable-connected computer(recommended)
After the driver installation is complete, Samsung Easy Printer Manager can be
used to change Wi-Fi Direct settings.
From the machine (Machines with a display screen)
Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Accessing the
menu" on page 33 ).
Samsung Easy Printer Manager is Available for Windows
and Mac OS users only.
•
•
Select
panel.
•
Enable Wi-Fi Direct.
From the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Samsung
Printers > Samsung Easy Printer Manager > Device Settings > Network.
-
Wi-Fi Direct On/Off: Select On to enable.
-
Device Name: Enter the printer’s name for searching for your printer on
a wireless network. By default, the device name is the model name.
-
IP Address: Enter the IP address of the printer. This IP address is used
only for the local network and not for the infrastructure wired or wireless
network. We recommend using the default local IP address (the default
local IP address of the printer for Wi-Fi Direct is 192.168.3.1 )
-
Group Owner: Activate this option to assign the printer the Wi-Fi Direct
group’s owner. The Group Owner acts similar to a wireless access point.
We recommend activating this option.
(Menu) > Network > Wireless > Wi-Fi Direct on the control
From the network-connected computer
If your printer is using a network cable or a wireless access point, you can enable
and configure Wi-Fi Direct from SyncThru™ Web Service.
•
Access SyncThru™ Web Service, select Settings > Network Settings >
Wireless > Wi-Fi Direct.
•
Enable or disable Wi-Fi Direct and set other options.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
191
Wireless network setup
21
• For Linux OS users,
Troubleshooting for wireless network
- Print an IP network configuration report to check the output (see
"Printing a network configuration report" on page 150).
- Access SyncThru Web Service, select Settings > Network Settings
> Wireless > Wi-Fi Direct.
Problems during setup or driver installation
- Enable or disable Wi-Fi Direct.
Printers Not Found
•
Your machine may not be turned on. Turn on your computer and the
machine.
•
USB cable is not connected between your computer and machine. Connect
the machine to your computer using the USB cable.
•
The machine does not support wireless networking (see "Features by
model" on page 7).
Setting up the mobile device
•
•
After setting up Wi-Fi Direct from the printer, refer to the user manual of the
mobile device you are using to set its Wi-Fi Direct.
After setting up Wi-Fi Direct, you need to download the mobile printing
application (For example: Samsung Mobile printer) to print from your
smartphone.
• When you have found the printer you want to connect to from your
mobile device, select the printer and the printer's LED will blink. Press the
WPS button on the printer and it will be connected to your mobile
device.
•
Connecting Failure - SSID Not Found
•
The machine is unable to find the network name (SSID) you have selected or
entered. Check the network name (SSID) on your access point and try
connecting again.
•
Your access point is not turned on. Turn on your access point.
If your mobile device does not support Wi-Fi Direct, you need to enter
the "Network Key" of a printer instead of pushing the WPS button.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
192
Wireless network setup
Connecting Failure - Invalid Security
•
Security is not configured correctly. Check the configured security on your
access point and machine.
Connecting Failure - General Connection Error
•
Your computer is not receiving a signal from your machine. Check the USB
cable and your machine’s power.
Connecting Failure - Connected Wired Network
•
Your machine is connected with a wired network cable. Remove the wired
network cable from your machine.
If the printing job is not working in DHCP mode, the problem may be caused
by the automatically changed IP address. Compare the IP address between
the product's IP address and the printer port's IP address.
How to compare:
1 Print the network information report of your printer, and then check the
IP address (see "Printing a network configuration report" on page 150).
2 Check the printer port's IP address from your computer.
a Click the Windows Start menu.
• For Windows 8, from Charms, select Search > Settings.
b For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printer and Faxes.
• For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware
and Sound > Printers.
• For Windows 7/8, select Control Panel > Devices and Printers.
Connecting Failure - Assigning the IP address
•
Cycle the power for the access point (or wireless router) and machine.
PC Connection Error
•
The configured network address is unable to connect between your
computer and machine.
-
For a DHCP network environment
The machine receives the IP address automatically (DHCP) when
computer is configured to DHCP.
• For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware >
Devices and Printers.
c Right-click your machine.
d For Windows XP/2003/2008/Vista, press Properties.
For Windows 7/8 and Windows Server 2008 R2, from context menus,
select the Printer properties.
If Printer properties item has ► mark, you can select other printer
drivers connected with selected printer.
e Click Port tab.
f Click Configure Port... button.
g Check if Printer Name or IP Address: is the IP address on the network
configuration Sheet.
3 Change the printer port's IP address if it is different from the network
information report's.
If you want to use the software installation CD to change the port IP,
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
193
Wireless network setup
Connect to a network printer. Then reconnect the IP address.
-
•
Check the wireless reception around the machine. If the router is far from
the machine or there is an obstacle, you might have difficulty receiving the
signal.
•
Cycle the power for the access point (or wireless router), machine, and
computer. Sometimes cycling the power can recover network
communication.
•
Check whether firewall software (V3 or Norton) is blocking the
communication.
For a Static network environment
The machine uses the static address when the computer is configured
to static address.
For example,
If the computer’s network information is as shown below:
▪
IP address: 169.254.133.42
▪
Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0
If the computer and the machine are connected on the same network and it
cannot be found when searching, firewall software might be blocking the
communication. Refer to the user's guide for the software to turn it off and
try searching for the machine again.
Then the machine’s network information should be as below:
▪
IP address: 169.254.133.43
▪
Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 (Use the computer’s subnet mask.)
▪
Gateway: 169.254.133.1
•
Check whether the machine's IP address is allocated correctly. You can
check the IP address by printing the network configuration report.
•
Check whether the access point (or wireless router) has a configured
security (password). If it has a password, refer to the access point (or wireless
router) administrator.
•
Check the machine's IP address. Reinstall the machine driver and change the
settings to connect to the machine on the network. Due to the
characteristics of DHCP, the allocated IP address could change if the
machine is not used for a long time or if the access point has been reset.
Other problems
If problems occur while using the machine on a network, check the following:
For information on the access point (or wireless router), refer to its own
user's guide.
•
You cannot enable wired and wireless networks at the same time.
•
Your computer, access point (or wireless router), or machine may not be
turned on.
Register the product's MAC address when you configure the DHCP server on
the access point (or wireless router). Then you can always use the IP address
that is set with the MAC address. You can identify the MAC address of your
machine by printing a network configuration report (see "Printing a network
configuration report" on page 150).
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
194
Wireless network setup
•
Check the wireless environment. You might not be able to connect to the
network in the infrastructure environment where you need to type in a
user's information before connecting to the access point (or wireless router).
•
This machine only supports IEEE 802.11 b/g/n and Wi-Fi. Other wireless
communication types (e.g., Bluetooth) are not supported.
•
When using the ad hoc mode, in operating systems such as Windows Vista,
you might need to set the wireless connection setting every time you use
the wireless machine.
•
You cannot use infrastructure mode and ad hoc mode at the same time for
Samsung wireless network machines.
•
The machine is within the range of the wireless network.
•
The machine is located away from obstacles that could block the wireless
signal.
•
If Wi-Fi Direct is ON, this machine only supports IEEE 802.11 b/g.
•
If the access point is set to work with the 802.11n standard only, it may not
connect to your machine.
Remove any large metal objects between the access point (or wireless
router) and the machine.
Make sure the machine and wireless access point (or wireless router) are not
separated by poles, walls, or support columns containing metal or concrete.
•
The machine is located away from other electronic devices that may
interfere with the wireless signal.
Many devices can interfere with the wireless signal, including a microwave
oven and some Bluetooth devices.
•
Whenever the configuration of your access point (or wireless router)
changes, you must do the devices wireless network setup again.
•
The maximum number of device that can be connected via Wi-Fi Direct is 3.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
195
Samsung Mobile Print
22
24
What is Samsung Mobile Print?
Samsung Mobile Print is a free application that enables users to print photos,
documents, and web pages directly from your smartphone or tablet. Samsung
Mobile Print is not only compatible with your Android and iOS smart phones
but also with your iPod Touch and tablet PC. It connects your mobile device to a
network connected Samsung printer or to a wireless printer through a Wi-Fi
access point. Installing a new driver or configuring network settings isn’t
necessary – just simply install the Samsung Mobile Print application, and it will
automatically detect compatible Samsung printers. Besides printing photos,
web pages, and PDFs, scanning is also supported. If you have a Samsung
multifunction printer, scan any document into a JPG, PDF, or PNG format for
quick and easy viewing on your mobile device.
Supported Mobile OS
•
Android OS 2.3 or higher
•
iOS 4.0 or higher
23
Downloading Samsung Mobile Print
To download Samsung Mobile Print, go to the application store (Samsung
Apps, Play Store, App Store) on your mobile device, and just search for
“Samsung Mobile Print.” You can also visit iTunes for Apple devices on your
computer.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
196
Using the NFC feature
The NFC (Near Field Communication) printer allows you to directly print/scan/
fax from your mobile device just by holding your mobile device over the NFC tag
on your printer. It does not require installing print driver or connecting to an
access point. You just need NFC supported mobile device. In order to use this
feature, Samsung Mobile Print app needs to be installed on your mobile device.
25
Requirements
•
• Depending on the material of the mobile device cover, NFC recognition
may not work properly.
Only Android OS 4.1 or higher will automatically enable the Wi-Fi Direct
feature on your mobile device when you enable the NFC feature. We
recommend you to upgrade your mobile device to Android OS 4.1 or higher
to use the NFC feature.
• Depending on the mobile device you are using, the transmission speed
may differ.
• This feature is available only for the model with a NFC tag (see "Machine
overview" on page 21).
• Using a cover or a battery other than the ones that came with the mobile
device, or a metal cover/sticker can block NFC.
NFC and Wi-Fi Direct enabled, Samsung Mobile Print app installed mobile
device with Android OS 4.0 or higher.
•
Wi-Fi Direct feature enabled printer (see "Setting up Wi-Fi Direct" on page
191).
• If NFC devices keep failing to communicate, remove and reinstall the
battery from the mobile device, then try again.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
197
Using the NFC feature
26
Printing
1
2
3
4
Check that NFC and Wi-Fi Direct features are enabled on your mobile
device and Wi-Fi Direct feature is enabled on your printer (see "Setting
the Wi-Fi Direct for mobile printing" on page 190).
Tag the NFC tag on your mobile device (usually located on the back of
the mobile device) over the NFC tag(
) on your printer.
Select print mode.
Select the content you want to print.
If neccessary, change the print option by pressing the
5
.
Tag the NFC tag on your mobile device (usually located on the back of
the mobile device) over the NFC tag(
) on your printer.
Wait few seconds for the mobile device to connect to the printer.
Wait few seconds for the Samsung Mobile Print app to start.
• For some mobile devices, NFC tag might not be located at the back of the
mobile device. Check the location of the NFC antenna on your mobile
device before tagging.
• For some mobile devices, NFC tag might not be located at the back of the
mobile device. Check the location of the NFC antenna on your mobile
device before tagging.
• If error message about changed PIN number appears, enter a changed
PIN number and press OK. Follow the instruction on the app screen to
update the PIN number.
• If error message about changed PIN number appears, enter a changed
PIN number and press OK. Follow the instruction on the app screen to
update the PIN number.
• If your do not have Samsung Mobile Print app installed on your mobile
devices, it automatically connects to Samsung Mobile Print app
download page. Download the app and try again.
6
The printer starts printing.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
198
Using the NFC feature
27
Scanning
1
3
4
Check that NFC and Wi-Fi Direct features are enabled on your mobile
device and Wi-Fi Direct feature is enabled on your printer (see "Setting
the Wi-Fi Direct for mobile printing" on page 190).
Select scan mode.
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading in manual
feeder" on page 43).
If necessary, change the scan option by pressing the
2
Tag the NFC tag on your mobile device (usually located on the back of
the mobile device) over the NFC tag(
) on your printer.
5
Wait few seconds for the Samsung Mobile Print app to start.
Tag the NFC tag on your mobile device (usually located on the back of
the mobile device) over the NFC tag(
) on your printer.
• For some mobile devices, NFC tag might not be located at the back of the
mobile device. Check the location of the NFC antenna on your mobile
device before tagging.
• For some mobile devices, NFC tag might not be located at the back of the
mobile device. Check the location of the NFC antenna on your mobile
device before tagging.
• If error message about changed PIN number appears, enter a changed
PIN number and press OK. Follow the instruction on the app screen to
update the PIN number.
• If error message about changed PIN number appears, enter a changed
PIN number and press OK. Follow the instruction on the app screen to
update the PIN number.
• If your do not have Samsung Mobile Print app installed on your mobile
devices, it automatically connects to Samsung Mobile Print app
download page. Download the app and try again.
.
6
The printer starts scanning the content.
The scanned data is saved on your mobile device.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
199
Using the NFC feature
• For some mobile devices, NFC tag might not be located at the back of the
mobile device. Check the location of the NFC antenna on your mobile
device before tagging.
If you want to continue scanning, follow the instruction on the app screen.
• If error message about changed PIN number appears, enter a changed
PIN number and press OK. Follow the instruction on the app screen to
update the PIN number.
28
Sending Fax
1
Check that NFC and Wi-Fi Direct features are enabled on your mobile
device and Wi-Fi Direct feature is enabled on your printer (see "Setting
the Wi-Fi Direct for mobile printing" on page 190).
2
Tag the NFC tag on your mobile device (usually located on the back of
the mobile device) over the NFC tag(
) on your printer.
Wait few seconds for the Samsung Mobile Print app to start.
• If your do not have Samsung Mobile Print app installed on your mobile
devices, it automatically connects to Samsung Mobile Print app
download page. Download the app and try again.
3
4
Select fax mode.
Select the content you want to send fax.
If necessary, enter the fax number and change the fax option by pressing
the
5
.
Tag the NFC tag on your mobile device (usually located on the back of
the mobile device) over the NFC tag(
) on your printer.
Wait few seconds for the mobile device to connect to the printer.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
200
Using the NFC feature
29
6
• For some mobile devices, NFC tag might not be located at the back of the
mobile device. Check the location of the NFC antenna on your mobile
device before tagging.
Registering Google Cloud Printer
• If error message about changed PIN number appears, enter a changed
PIN number and press OK. Follow the instruction on the app screen to
update the PIN number.
1
Check that NFC and Wi-Fi Direct features are enabled on your mobile
device and Wi-Fi Direct feature is enabled on your printer.
2
Tag the NFC tag on your mobile device (usually located on the back of
the mobile device) over the NFC tag(
) on your printer.
The printer starts faxing the content.
Wait a few seconds for the Samsung Mobile Print app to start.
• For some mobile devices, NFC tag might not be located at the back of the
mobile device. Check the location of the NFC antenna on your mobile
device before tagging.
• If error message about changed PIN number appears, enter a changed
PIN number and press OK. Follow the instruction on the app screen to
update the PIN number.
• If your do not have Samsung Mobile Print app installed on your mobile
devices, it automatically connects to Samsung Mobile Print app
download page. Download the app and try again.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
201
Using the NFC feature
3
4
5
Select device status icon.
Select Google Cloud Print > Register Google Cloud Printer.
Tag the NFC tag on your mobile device (usually located on the back of
the mobile device) over the NFC tag(
) on your printer.
Wait a few seconds for the mobile device to connect to the printer.
• For some mobile devices, NFC tag might not be located at the back of the
mobile device. Check the location of the NFC antenna on your mobile
device before tagging.
• If error message about changed PIN number appears, enter a changed
PIN number and press OK. Follow the instruction on the app screen to
update the PIN number.
6
Confirm your printer in pop-up window.
Now your printer is registered with Google Cloud Print™ service
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
202
AirPrint
4
Only AirPrint certified machines can use the AirPrint feature. Check the box
your machine came in for the AirPrint certified mark.
AirPrint allows you to wirelessly print directly from an iPhone, iPad,
and iPod touch running the latest version of iOS.
Bonjour(mDNS) and IPP protocols are required on your machine to use the
AirPrint feature. You can enable the AirPrint feature by one of the following
methods.
•
ID: admin
•
Password: sec00000
5
When the SyncThru™ Web Service window opens, click Settings >
Network Settings.
6
Click Raw TCP/IP, LPR, IPP or mDNS .
30
Setting up AirPrint
Type in the ID and Password, then click Login. If it’s your first time
logging into SyncThru™ Web Service, type in the below default ID and
password. We recommend you to change the default password for
security reasons.
You can enable the IPP protocol or mDNS protocol.
31
Printing via AirPrint
1
2
Check whether the machine is connected to the network.
For example, the iPad manual provides these instructions:
Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer, Safari, or Firefox and enter
your machine’s new IP address in the browser window.
For example,
3
Click Login in the upper right of the SyncThru™ Web Service website.
1
2
3
4
Open your email, photo, web page, or document you want to print.
Touch the action icon(
).
Select your printer driver name and option menu to set up.
Touch Print button. Print it out.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
203
AirPrint
Cancelling print job: To cancel the printing job or view the print summary,
click the print center icon (
) in multitasking area. You can click cancel in
the print center.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
204
Google Cloud Print™
Google Cloud Print™ is a service that allows you to print to a printer using your
If the network environment of your printer is using a proxy server, you need
to configure the proxy’s IP and port number from Proxy Setting. Contact
your network service provider or network administrator for more
information.
smart phone, tablet, or any other web-connected devices. Just register your
Google account with the printer, and you are ready to use the Google Cloud
Print™ service. You can print your document or email with Chrome OS, Chrome
browser, or a Gmail™/ Google Docs™ application on your mobile device, so you
don’t need to install the printer driver on the mobile device. Refer to the Google
website (http://www.google.com/cloudprint/learn/ or http://
support.google.com/cloudprint) for more information about Google Cloud
Print™.
5
6
32
Registering your Google account to the printer
Registering from Samsung Mobile Print app
7
Click Register.
You need to authenticate as an administrator. Type in the below default
ID and password. We recommend you to change the default password
for security reasons.
•
ID: admin
•
Password: sec00000
Confirm your printer in the pop-up window.
Now your printer is registered with Google Cloud Print™ service.
In order to use this feature, Samsung Mobile Print app needs to be installed
on your mobile device.
1
2
3
4
Registering from the Chrome Browser
Open Samsung Mobile Print app from your mobile device.
Select device setting.
• Make sure the printer machine is turned on and connected to a wired or
wireless network that has access to the Internet.
• You should create your Google account in the advance.
Select Google Cloud Print.
Enter your printer’s name and description.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
205
Google Cloud Print™
1
2
3
4
Open the Chrome browser.
5
Click Login in the upper right corner of the SyncThru™ Web Service
website.
6
9
The confirmation pop-up window appears.
Visit www.google.com.
Sign in to the Google website with your Gmail™ address.
If you set the browser to block pop-ups, the confirmation window will not
appear. Allow the site to show pop-ups.
Enter your printer’s IP address in the address field and press the Enter key
or click Go.
If it’s your first time logging into SyncThru™ Web Service you need to
log-in as an administrator. Type in the below default ID and Password.
We recommend you to change the default password for security
reasons.
•
ID: admin
•
Password: sec00000
Click Register.
10
11
Click Finish printer registration.
Click Manage your printers.
Now your printer is registered with Google Cloud Print™ service.
Google Cloud Print™-ready devices will appear in the list.
If the network environment is using a proxy server, you need to configure
the proxy’s IP and port number from Settings > Network Settings >
Google Cloud Print > Proxy Setting. Contact your network service
provider or network administrator for more information.
7
When the SyncThru™ Web Service window opens, click Settings >
Network Settings > Google Cloud Print.
8
Enter your printer’s name and description.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
206
Google Cloud Print™
33
Printing with Google Cloud Print™
The printing procedure varies depending on the application or the device you
are using. You can see the application list that supports Google Cloud Print™
service.
5
6
7
Tap the Cloud Print
button.
Set the printing options if you want.
Tap Click here to Print.
Printing from the Chrome browser
Make sure the printer is turned on and connected to a wired or wireless
network that has access to the Internet.
Printing from an application on mobile device
The following steps are an example of using the Google Docs™ app from
Android mobile phone.
1
Install the Cloud Print application on your mobile device.
If you do not have the application, download it from the application store
such as Android Market or App Store.
2
3
4
The following steps are an example of using the Chrome browser.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Run Chrome.
Open the document or email that you want to print.
Click the wrench icon
in the browser’s top right corner.
Click Print. A new tab for printing appears.
Select Print with Google Cloud Print.
Click the Print button.
Access the Google Docs™ application from your mobile device.
Tap the option
Tap the send
button of the document that you want to print.
button.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
207
3. Useful Setting Menus
This chapter explains how to browse the current status of your machine, and the method of setting for advanced
machine setup.
• Before you begin reading a chapter
209
• Print menu
210
• Copy menu
211
• Fax menu
214
• System setup
217
Before you begin reading a chapter
This chapter explains all the features available for this series' models to help users easily understand the features.
You can check the features available for each model in the Basic Guide (see "Menu overview" on page 33).
The following are tips for using this chapter
•
The control panel provides access to various menus to set up the machine or use the machine’s functions. These menus can be accessed by pressing
•
Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.
•
For models that do not have the
•
Some menu names may differ from your machine depending on its options or the models.
(Menu).
(Menu) on the control panel, this feature is not applicable (see "Control panel overview" on page 24).
3. Useful Setting Menus
209
Print menu
Item
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
page 33).
Description
You can set the machine to print copies on both sides of
paper.
• Off: Prints in normal mode.
• Short Edge
To change the menu options:
2
•
Press
(Menu) > Print Setup on the control panel.
Duplexa
3
Item
5
Description
• Long Edge
Selects the direction in which information is printed on a
page.
• Portrait
Copies
You can enter the number of copies using the number
keypad.
Resolution
Specifies the number of dots printed per inch (dpi). The
higher the setting, the sharper printed characters and
graphics.
Clear Text
Prints text darker than on a normal document.
Auto CR
Allows you to append the required carriage return to
each line feed, which is useful for Unix or DOS users.
SkipBlankPages
The printer detects the pritning data from computer
whether a page is empty or not. You can set to skip the
blank pages.
Emulation
Sets the emulation type and option.
Orientation
• Landscape
a. M287xND/M287xFD/M287xDW/M287xFW/M287xHN/M288xFW/M288xHW only.
3. Useful Setting Menus
210
Copy menu
1
Item
Copy feature
Description
You can set the machine to print copies on both sides of
paper.
• 1 Sided: Scans one side of an original and prints it on
one side of the paper.
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
page 33).
• 1->2Sided
a
Duplex
To change the menu options:
•
Press
(copy) >
Item
Original Size
• 1->2Sided Rotated
(Menu) > Copy Feature on the control panel.
Description
Sets the image size.
Reduces or enlarges the size of a copied image (see
"Reduced or enlarged copy" on page 63).
Reduce/Enlarge
If the machine is set to Eco mode, reduce and
enlarge features are not available.
Darkness
Adjusts the brightness level to make a copy that is
easier to read, when the original contains faint
markings and dark images (see "Darkness" on page 62)
Original Type
Improves the copy quality by selecting the document
type for the current copy job (see "Original" on page 62)
3. Useful Setting Menus
211
Copy menu
Item
Description
Item
Prints an image without its background. This copy
feature removes the background color and can be
helpful when copying an original containing color in
the background, such as a newspaper or a catalog.
Set the machine to sort the copy job. For example, if you
make 2 copies of a 3 page original, one complete 3 page
document will print followed by a second complete
document.
• On: Prints output in sets to match the sequence of
originals.
Description
Adjust Bkgd.
• Off: Does not use this feature.
• Auto: Optimizes the background.
• Enhance Lev.1~2: The higher the number is, the
more vivid the background is.
Collation
• Erase Lev.1~4: The higher the number is, the lighter
the background is.
• Off: Prints output sorted into stacks of individual
pages.
Layout
a. M287xND/M287xFD/M287xDW/M287xFW/M287xHN/M288xFW/M288xHW only.
Adjusts the layout format such as ID copy, 2/4-up, and
booklet.
3. Useful Setting Menus
212
Copy menu
2
Copy Setup
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
page 33).
To change the menu options:
Press
(copy) >
Item
Change Default
(Menu) > Copy Setup on the control panel.
Description
Resets the value or setting to the printer’s out-of-box
state.
3. Useful Setting Menus
213
Fax menu
3
Item
Fax Feature
Description
Sends a fax to multiple destinations (see "Sending a fax
to multiple destinations" on page 68).
• Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview"
on page 33).
Multi Send
You cannot send a color fax using this feature.
• Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on
model or country (see "Features by model" on page 7).
To change the menu options:
•
Press
(fax) >
Sets your machine to send a fax at a later time when you
will not be present (see "Delaying a fax transmission" on
page 253).
Delay Send
(Menu)> Fax Feature on the control panel.
Item
You cannot send a color fax using this feature.
Description
Darkness
Adjusts the brightness level to scan an original that is
easier to read, when the original contains faint
markings and dark images (see "Darkness" on page 70).
Resolution
The default document settings produce good results
when using typical text-based originals. However, if you
send originals that are of poor quality, or contain
photographs, you can adjust the resolution to produce
a higher quality fax (see "Resolution" on page 69).
Original Size
Sets the image size.
Priority Send
Send Forward/ Rcv.
Forward
Scans the original into memory and immediately
transmits it when the current operation is finished.
Priority transmission will interrupt a sending to multiple
destinations between stations (example, when the
transmission to station A ends, before transmission to
station B begins) or between redial attempts (see
"Sending a priority fax" on page 255).
Forwards the received or sent fax to other destination
by a fax or PC. If you are out of office but have to receive
the fax, this feature may be useful.
• See "Forwarding a sent fax to another destination"
on page 255.
• See "Forwarding a received fax" on page 256.
3. Useful Setting Menus
214
Fax menu
Item
Secure Receive
Add Page
Cancel Job
Description
Stores the received fax in memory without printing out.
To print received documents, you need to enter the
password. You can prevent your received faxes from
being accessed by unauthorized people (see "Receiving
in secure receiving mode" on page 259).
Adds additional documents to a reserved delay fax job
(see "Adding documents to a reserved fax" on page
254).
Cancels the delayed fax job which is saved in memory
(see "Canceling a reserved fax job" on page 254).
4
To change the menu options:
•
Press
(fax) >
Item
Description
Redial Times
Sets the number of redial attempts. If you enter 0, the
machine will not redial.
Redial Term
Sets the time interval before automatic redialling.
Prefix Dial
Sets a prefix of up to five digits. This number dials
before any automatic dial number is started. It is useful
for accessing a PABX exchange.
ECM Mode
Sends faxes using error correction mode (ECM) to
makes sure the faxes are sent smoothly without any
error. It may take more time.
Modem Speed
Select the maximum modem speed you want if the
phone line fails to sustain a higher modem speed.
Fax Confirm.
Sets the machine to print a report whether a fax
transmission was successfully completed or not. If you
select On-Error, the machine prints a report only when
a transmission is not successful.
Image TCR
Prints a transmission report with a minimized image of
the first page of the fax sent.
Dial Mode
Sets the dialing mode to either tone or pulse. This
setting may not be available depending on your
country.
Sending setup
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
page 33).
(Menu) > Fax Setup > Sending on the control panel.
3. Useful Setting Menus
215
Fax menu
5
Item
Receiving setup
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
page 33).
Auto Reduction
Automatically reduces an incoming fax page to fit the
size of the paper loaded in the machine.
Discard Size
Discards a specific length from the end of the received
fax.
Junk Fax Setup
Blocks any unwanted faxes that you stored in the
memory as junk fax numbers. This setting may not be
available depending on your country.
DRPD Mode
Enables a user to use a single telephone line to answer
several different telephone numbers. You can set the
machine to recognize different ring patterns for each
number. This setting may not be available depending
on your country (see "Receiving faxes using DRPD
mode" on page 258).
Duplex Printa
Prints the received fax data on both sides of the paper.
You can save the paper usage.
Change Default
Resets the value or setting to the printer’s out-of-box
state.
To change the menu options:
•
Press
(fax) >
Item
(Menu) > Fax Setup > Receiving on the control panel.
Description
Receive Mode
Selects the default fax receiving mode.
Ring to Answer
Specifies the number of times the machine rings before
answering an incoming call.
Stamp Rcv Name
Automatically prints the page number, and the date
and time of reception at the bottom of each page of a
received fax.
Rcv Start Code
Initiates fax reception from an extension phone
plugged into the EXT socket on the back of the
machine. If you pick up the extension phone and hear
fax tones, enter the code. It is preset to *9* at the
factory.
Description
Manual TX/RX
Setting this option to ON provides the ability to send or
receive a fax while the line is busy. You can select to
send or receive a fax by either picking up the extension
phone receiver and pressing the Start button or by
pressing the
(On Hook Dial) button and pressing
the Start button.
a. M287xFD/M287xFW/M287xHN/M288xFW/M288xHW only.
3. Useful Setting Menus
216
System setup
6
Item
Machine setup
Description
Sets how long the machine waits before going to power
save mode.
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
page 33).
PowerSave
Turns power off automatically when the machine has
been in power save mode for the length of time set in
Auto Power Off > On > Timeout.
To change the menu options:
•
Press
When the machine does not receive data for an extended
period of time, power consumption is automatically
lowered.
(Menu) > System Setup > Machine Setup on the control panel.
Item
• This option only appears in the M267xN/
M287xND.
Description
Machine ID
Sets the machine ID which will be printed at the top of
each fax page that you send.
Fax Number
Sets the fax number which will be printed at the top of
each fax page that you send.
Date & Time
Sets the date and time.
Clock Mode
Selects the format for displaying time between 12 hr. and
24 hr.
Language
Sets the language of the text that appears on the control
panel display.
Default Mode
Sets the machine’s default mode among fax mode and
copy mode.
Auto Power Off
• To turn the machine on again, press the
(Power/Wake Up) button on the control
panel (make sure the main power switch is on).
• If you run the printer driver or Samsung Easy
Printer Manager, the time automatically
extends.
• While the machine is connected to the
network or working on a print job, Auto
Power Off feature doesn't work.
3. Useful Setting Menus
217
System setup
Item
Description
Item
Determine whether or not the machine continues
printing when it detects the paper does not match the
paper settings.
You can set the condition to wake up from power-save
mode.
• On: The machine wake up from the power save mode
on the following cases:
Wakeup Event
- Pressing any button
- Opening or closing the paper tray
Auto Continue
• Off: The machine wake up from the power save mode
only when the
(Power/Wake Up) button is
pressed.
System Timeout
Job Timeout
Sets the length of time the printer waits before printing
the last page of a print job that does not end with a
command to print the page.
Altitude Adj.
Optimize print quality according to the machine’s
altitude.
• 0 Sec: This option allows you to continue printing
when the paper size you have set is mismatched with
the paper in the tray.
• 30 Sec: If a paper mismatch occurs, an error message
will display. The machine waits for about 30 second,
then automatically clear the message and continue
printing.
- Inserting paper in the document feeder
Sets the time that the machine remembers previously
used copy settings. After the timeout, the machine
restores the default copy settings.
Description
• Off: If a paper mismatch occurs, the machine waits
until you insert the correct paper.
Paper Substit.
Automatically substitutes the printer driver’s paper size
to prevent the paper mismatch between Letter and A4.
For example, if you have A4 paper in the tray but you set
the paper size to Letter in the printer driver, the machine
prints on A4 paper and vice versa.
Toner Save
Activating this mode extends the life of your toner
cartridge and reduces your cost per page beyond what
one would experience in the normal mode, but it reduces
print quality.
3. Useful Setting Menus
218
System setup
7
Item
Description
Paper setup
Allows you to save print resources and enables ecofriendly printing.
• Default Mode: Select whether to turn the Eco mode
on or off.
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
page 33).
Eco Settings
On force (On-Forced): Sets the Eco mode on with
password. If a user wants to turn the Eco mode
on/off, the user needs to enter the password.
To change the menu options:
•
Press
• Select Temp.: Selects the eco template set from the
SyncThru™ Web Service.
(Menu) > System Setup > Paper Setup on the control panel.
Item
Description
Paper Size
Sets the paper size as A4, Letter, or other paper sizes,
according to your requirements.
Paper Type
Chooses the type of the paper for each tray.
Paper Source
Selects from which tray the paper is used.
Margin
Sets the margins for the document.
3. Useful Setting Menus
219
System setup
8
Item
Sound / Volume
Turns on or off the sounds from the telephone line
through the speaker, such as a dial tone or a fax tone.
With this option set to Comm. which means the speaker
is on until the remote machine answers.
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
page 33).
To change the menu options:
•
Press
(Menu) > System Setup > Sound/Volume on the control panel.
Item
Speaker
Turns the key sound on or off. With this option set to on,
a tone sounds each time a key is pressed.
Alarm Sound
Turns the alarm sound on or off. With this option set to
on, an alarm tone sounds when an error occurs or fax
communication ends.
You can adjust the volume level using
(On
Hook Dial). You can adjust the speaker volume
only when the telephone line is connected.
a Press
(fax) on the control panel.
b Press
(On Hook Dial). A dial tone sounds
from the speaker.
c Press the arrows until you hear the volume you
want.
Description
Key Sound
Description
d Press
(On Hook Dial) to save the change
and return to ready mode.
Ringer
Adjusts the ringer volume. For the ringer volume, you can
select off, low, middle, and high level.
3. Useful Setting Menus
220
System setup
9
Item
Report
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
page 33).
Fax Sent
Prints information on the faxes you have recently
sent.
Scheduled Jobs
Prints the document list currently stored for
delayed faxes along with the starting time and
type of each operation.
Fax Confirm.
Sets the machine to print a report whether a fax
transmission was successfully completed or not.
JunkFax
Prints the fax numbers specified as junk fax
numbers.
PCL Font List
Prints the PCL font list.
Address Book
Prints all of the email addresses currently stored
in the machine’s memory.
To change the menu options:
•
Press
(Menu) > System Setup > Report on the control panel.
Item
Description
Configuration
Prints a report on the machine's overall
configuration.
Demo Page
Prints the demo page to check whether your
machine is printing properly or not.
Network Conf.
Prints information on your machine’s network
connection and configuration.
Supplies Info.
Prints supplies’ information page.
Usage Counter
Prints a usage page. The usage page contains the
total number of pages printed.
Fax Received
Prints information on the faxes you have recently
received.
Description
10
Maintenance
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
page 33).
3. Useful Setting Menus
221
System setup
To change the menu options:
•
Press
11
Network setup
(Menu) > System Setup > Maintenance on the control panel.
Item
Description
CLR Empty Msg.
When toner cartridge is empty, this option appears. You
can clear the empty message.
Supplies Life
Shows the supply life indicators (see "Monitoring the
supplies life" on page 84.)
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
page 33).
•
Press
(Menu)> Network on the control panel,
Allows you to adjust the image setting such as density.
• Custom Color: adjusts contrast.
Image Mgr.
TCP/IP (IPv4)
Customizes the level to alert toner low or toner empty
(see "Setting the toner low alert" on page 85).
Allows you to set the alarm for when the imaging unit is
low.
ImgU.Low Alert
M2675/M2676/M2875/M2876 series only.
Serial Number
Description
Selects the appropriate protocol and configure
parameters to use the network environment.
- Default: optimizes density automatically.
- Print Density: allows you to manually adjust the
contrast. It is recommended to use the Default
setting for best quality.
TonerLow Alert
Option
There are lots of parameters to be set. If you are
not sure, leave as is, or consult the network
administrator.
TCP/IP (IPv6)
Selects this option to use the network environment
through IPv6 (see "IPv6 configuration" on page 162).
Ethernet Speed
Configure the network transmission speed.
Wireless
Selects this option to use the wireless network.
Shows the machine’s serial number. When you call for
service or register as a user on the Samsung website, you
can find this.
3. Useful Setting Menus
222
System setup
Option
Description
Option
You can activate or deactivate the following protocols.
• MDNS: You have to enable this option to use MDNS
(Multicast Domain Name System) protocol.
• Net. Activate: : You can set whether to use Ethernet
on or off.
• SetIP: You have to enable this option to use SetIP
protocol.
• Http Activate: You can sets whether to use
SyncThru™ Web Service or not.
• WINS: You can configure the WINS server.
WINS(Windows Internet Name Service) is used in the
Windows operating system.
Protocol Mgr.
Description
Protocol Mgr.
(continued.)
• SNMP V1/V2: You have to enable this option to use
SNMP V1/V2 protocol. Administrator’s can use SNMP
to monitor and manage machines on the network.
• SLP: You can configure SLP (Service Location
Protocol) settings. This protocol allows host
applications to find services in a local area network
without prior configuration.
Turn the power off and on after you change this
option.
• UPnP(SSDP): You have to enable this option to use
UPnP(SSDP) protocol.
Turn the power off and on after you change
above options.
Network Conf.
This list shows information on your machine’s network
connection and configuration.
Clear Setting
Reverts the network settings to the default values.
(Reboot required.)
3. Useful Setting Menus
223
4. Special Features
This chapter explains special copying, scanning, faxing, and printing features.
• Altitude adjustment
225
• Entering various characters
226
• Setting up the fax address book
228
• Printing features
231
• Scan features
245
• Fax features
252
• The procedures in this chapter are mainly based on Windows 7.
• It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for some models.
Altitude adjustment
Print quality is affected by atmospheric pressure, which is determined by the
height of the machine above sea level. The following information will guide you
on how to set your machine for the best print quality.
Before you set the altitude value, determine the altitude where you are.
•
Normal: 0-1,000 m(3,280 ft)
•
High1: 1,000 m(3,280 ft)-2,000 m(6,561 ft)
•
High2: 2,000 m(6,561 ft)-3,000 m(9,842 ft)
•
High3: 3,000 m(9,842 ft)-4,000 m(13,123 ft)
•
High4: 4,000 m(13,123 ft)-5,000 m(16,404 ft)
You can set the altitude value from Device Settings in Samsung Easy Printer
Manager program or Machine section in Printer Settings Utility program.
•
For Windows and Mac users, you set from Samsung Easy Printer Manager
>
(Switch to advanced mode) > Device Settings, see "Device
Settings" on page 272.
• If your machine is connected to the network, you can set the altitude via
SyncThru™ Web Service (see "Using SyncThru™ Web Service" on page
266).
• You can also set the altitude in System Setup option on the machine’s
display (see "Menu overview" on page 33).
4. Special Features
225
Entering various characters
As you perform various tasks, you may need to enter names and numbers. For
example, when you set up your machine, you enter your name or your
company’s name, and the fax number. When you store fax numbers or email
addresses in memory, you may also enter the corresponding names.
2
Keypad letters and numbers
• Special character sets may differ from your machine depending on its
options or the models.
1
• Some of the follow key values may not appear depending on the job you
are doing.
Entering alphanumeric characters
Press the button until the correct letter appears on the display. For example, to
enter the letter O, press 6, labeled with MNO. Each time you press 6, the display
shows a different letter, M, N, O, m, n, o and finally 6. To find the letter that you
want to enter, see "Keypad letters and numbers" on page 226.
• You can enter a space by pressing 1 twice.
• To delete the last digit or character, press the left/right or up/down arrow
button.
Key
Assigned numbers, letters, or characters
1
@/.‘1
2
ABCabc2
3
DEFdef3
4
GHIghi4
5
JKLjkl5
4. Special Features
226
Entering various characters
Key
Assigned numbers, letters, or characters
6
MNOmno6
7
PQRSpqrs7
8
TUVtuv8
9
WXYZwxyz9
0
&+-,0
*
*
(These symbols are available when you type for network authentication.)
#
#
(These symbols are available when you type for network authentication.)
4. Special Features
227
Setting up the fax address book
You can set up speed number with the fax numbers you use frequently via
SyncThru™ Web Service and then easily and quickly enter fax numbers by
entering the location numbers assigned to them in address book.
4
Using speed dial numbers
When you are prompted to enter a destination number while sending a fax,
enter the speed dial number at which you stored the number you want.
3
Registering a speed dial number
1
2
Select
(fax) >
the control panel.
• For a one-digit (0-9) speed dial number, press and hold the
corresponding digit button on the number keypad for more than 2
seconds.
(Address Book) > New & Edit > Speed Dial on
• For a two- or three-digit speed dial number, press the first digit button(s)
and then hold down the last digit button for more than 2 seconds.
Enter a speed dial number and press OK.
• You can print the address book list by selecting
If an entry is already stored in the number you choose, the display shows the
message to allow you to change it. To start over with another speed dial
number, press
(fax) >
(Address Book) > Print.
(Back).
5
3
4
5
Enter the name you want and press OK.
Enter the fax number you want and press OK.
Press the
Editing speed dial numbers
1
Select
(fax) >
the control panel.
2
3
4
Enter the speed dial number you want to edit and press OK.
(Stop/Clear) button to return to ready mode.
(Address Book) > New & Edit > Speed Dial on
Change the name and press OK.
Change the fax number and press OK.
4. Special Features
228
Setting up the fax address book
5
Press
(Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode.
7
Editing group dial numbers
6
Registering a group dial number
1
Select
(fax) >
the control panel.
(Address Book) > New & Edit > Group Dial on
2
Enter a group dial number and press OK.
Select
(fax) >
the control panel.
(Address Book) > New & Edit > Group Dial on
2
3
Enter the group dial number you want to edit and press OK.
Enter a new speed dial number to add and press OK, then Add? appears.
Enter a speed dial number stored in the group and press OK, Delete?
appears.
If an entry is already stored in the number you choose, the display shows the
message to allow you to change it. To start over with another speed dial
number, press
(Back).
3
1
Search by entering the first few letters of the speed dial’s name to put in
the group.
4
5
6
7
Select the name and number you want and press OK.
8
Press
4
5
6
7
Press OK to add or delete the number.
Repeat step 3 to add or delete more numbers.
Select No at the Another Number? and press OK.
Press
(Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode.
Select Yes when Another Number? appears.
Repeat step 3 to include other speed dial numbers into the group.
When you have finished, select No when Another Number? appears
and press OK.
(Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode.
4. Special Features
229
Setting up the fax address book
8
Searching address book for an entry
There are two ways to search for a number in memory. You can either scan from
A to Z sequentially, or you can search by entering the first letters of the name
associated with the number.
1
Select ct
(fax) >
(Address Book) > Search & Dial > Speed Dial
or Group Dial on the control panel.
2
3
Enter All or ID and press OK.
Press the name and number or the keypad button labeled with the letter
you want to search.
For example, if you want to find the name “MOBILE,” press the 6 button,
which is labeled with “MNO.”
4
Press
(Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode.
9
Printing address book
You can check your
1
2
Select ct
(Address Book) settings by printing a list.
(fax) >
(Address Book) > Print on the control panel.
The machine begins printing.
4. Special Features
230
Printing features
If Printing preferences has a ►, you can select other printer drivers
connected to the selected printer.
• For basic printing features, refer to the Basic Guide (see "Basic printing"
on page 55).
• This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
(see "Features by model" on page 7).
5
6
10
Change the settings on each tab.
Click OK.
Changing the default print settings
1
If you want to change the settings for each print job, change it in Printing
Preferences.
Click the Windows Start menu.
•
For Windows 8, from the Charms, select Search > Settings.
11
2
For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printer and Faxes.
•
For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware
and Sound > Printers.
•
For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware >
Devices and Printers.
•
3
4
For Windows 7/8, select Control Panel > Devices and Printers.
Setting your machine as a default machine
1
Click the Windows Start menu.
•
2
For Windows 8, from the Charms, select Search > Settings.
For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printer and Faxes.
Right-click on your machine.
•
For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware
and Sound > Printers.
For Windows XP/Server 2003/Server 2008/Vista, select Printing
Preferences.
•
For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware >
Devices and Printers.
For Windows 7/8 or Windows Server 2008 R2, from context menus, select
Printing preferences.
•
For Windows 7/8, select Control Panel > Devices and Printers.
4. Special Features
231
Printing features
3
4
Select your machine.
1
Check the Print to file box in the Print window.
2
3
Click Print.
Right-click your machine and select Set as Default Printer.
For Windows 7 or Windows Server 2008 R2, if Set as default printer has a
►, you can select other printer drivers connected to the selected printer.
12
Using advanced print features
XPS printer driver: used to print XPS file format.
• See "Features by model" on page 7.
• The XPS printer driver can be installed only on Windows Vista OS or
higher.
• For models that provide XPS driver from the Samsung website, http://
www.samsung.com > find your product> Support or downloads.
Type in the destination path and the file name, and then click OK.
For example, c:\Temp\file name.
Printing to a file (PRN)
You will sometimes need to save the print data as a file.
If you type in only the file name, the file is automatically saved in My
Documents, Documents and Settings, or Users. The saved folder may
differ, depending on your operating system or the application you are
using.
4. Special Features
232
Printing features
Understanding special printer features
You can use advanced printing features when using your machine.
To take advantage of the printer features provided by your printer driver, click Properties or Preferences in the application’s Print window to change the print
settings. The machine name, that appears in the printer properties window may differ depending on the machine in use.
• Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.
• Select the Help menu or click the
on page 58).
Item
button from the window or press F1 on your keyboard and click on any option you want to know about (see "Using help"
Description
Multiple Pages per
Side
Selects the number of pages to print on a single sheet of paper. To print more than one page per sheet, the pages will be reduced in size and
arranged in the order you specify. You can print up to 16 pages on one sheet.
Poster Printing
Prints a single-page document onto 4 (Poster 2x2), 9 (Poster 3x3), or 16 (Poster 4x4) sheets of paper, for the purpose of pasting the sheets
together to form one poster-size document.
Select the Poster Overlap value. Specify Poster Overlap in millimeters or inches by selecting the radio button on the upper right of Basic tab
to make it easier to paste the sheets together.
4. Special Features
233
Printing features
Item
Description
Prints your document on both sides of a sheet of paper and arranges the pages so that the paper can be folded in half after printing to produce
a booklet.
Booklet Printingab
• If you want to make a booklet, you need to print on Letter, Legal, A4, US Folio, or Oficio sized print media.
8
9
• The Booklet Printing option is not available for all paper sizes. Select the available paper Size option under the Paper tab to see what
paper sizes are available.
• If you select an unavailable paper size, this option can be automatically canceled. Select only available paper (paper without
mark).
• Double-sided
Printing
or
Print on both sides of a sheet of paper (duplex). Before printing, decide how you want your document oriented.
b
• Double-sided
Printing (Manual)a
• You can use this feature with Letter, Legal, A4, US Folio or Oficio sized paper
• If your machine does not have a duplex unit, you should complete the printing job manually. The machine prints every other page of
the document first. After that, a message appears on your computer.
• Skip Blank Pages feature does not work when you select the duplex option.
4. Special Features
234
Printing features
Item
• Double-sided
Printing
b
Description
• Off: Disables this feature.
• Long Edge: This option is the conventional layout used in bookbinding.
• Double-sided
Printing (Manual)a
• Short Edge: This option is the conventional layout used in calendars.
Paper Options
Changes the size of a document to appear larger or smaller on the printed page by entering in a percentage by which to enlarge or decrease the
document.
Watermark
The watermark option allows you to print text over an existing document. For example, you use it when you want to have large gray letters
reading “DRAFT” or “CONFIDENTIAL” printed diagonally across the first page or all pages of a document.
Watermark
(Creating a
watermark)
a To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences.
b Click the Advanced tab, select Edit from the Watermark drop-down list. The Edit Watermarks window appears.
c Enter a text message in the Watermark Message box.
You can enter up to 256 characters. The message displays in the preview window.
4. Special Features
235
Printing features
Item
Watermark
(Editing a watermark)
Watermark
(Deleting a
watermark)
Description
a
b
c
d
e
To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences.
Click the Advanced tab, select Edit from the Watermark drop-down list. The Edit Watermarks window appears.
Select the watermark you want to edit from the Current Watermarks list and change the watermark message and options.
Click Update to save the changes.
Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
a
b
c
d
To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences.
Click the Advanced tab, select Edit from the Watermark drop-down list. The Edit Watermarks window appears.
Select the watermark you want to delete from the Current Watermarks list and click Delete.
Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
This option is available only when you use the PCL/SPL printer driver (see "Software" on page 7).
Overlaya
An overlay is text and/or images stored in the computer hard disk drive (HDD) as a special file format that can be printed on any document.
Overlays are often used to take the place of letterhead paper. Rather than using preprinted letterhead, you can create an overlay containing
exactly the same information that is currently on your letterhead. To print a letter with your company’s letterhead, you do not need to load
preprinted letterhead paper in the machine: just print the letterhead overlay on your document.
To use a page overlay, you must create a new page overlay containing your logo or image.
• The overlay document size must be the same as the document you print with the overlay. Do not create an overlay with a watermark.
• The resolution of the overlay document must be the same as that of the document you will print with the overlay.
4. Special Features
236
Printing features
Item
Overlaya
(Creating a new page
overlay)
Description
a
b
c
d
To save the document as an overlay, access Printing Preferences.
Click the Advanced tab, and select Edit from the Text drop-down list. Edit Overlay window appears.
In the Edit Overlay window, click Create.
In the Save As window, type a name up to eight characters in the File name box. Select the destination path, if necessary (The default is
C:\FormOver).
e Click Save. The name appears on the Overlay List.
f Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
The file is not printed. Instead, it is stored on your computer hard disk drive.
a Click the Advanced tab.
b Select the desired overlay from the Text drop-down list.
c If the overlay file you want does not appear in the Text drop-down list, select Edit... from the list and click Load. Select the overlay file you
want to use.
If you have stored the overlay file you want to use in an external source, you can also load the file when you access the Open window.
Overlaya
After you select the file, click Open. The file appears in the Overlay List box and is available for printing. Select the overlay from the Overlay
(Using a page overlay)
List box.
d If necessary, check Confirm Page Overlay When Printing box. If this box is checked, a message window appears each time you submit a
document for printing, asking you to confirm printing an overlay on your document.
If this box is not checked and an overlay has been selected, the overlay automatically prints with your document.
e Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
Overlaya
(Deleting a page
overlay)
a
b
c
d
e
f
In the Printing Preferences window, click the Advanced tab.
Select Edit in the Text drop down list.
Select the overlay you want to delete from the Overlay List box.
Click Delete.
When a confirming message window appears, click Yes.
Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. You can delete page overlays that you no longer use.
a. This option is not available when you use XPS driver.
b. M287xND/M287xFD/M287xDW/M287xFW/M287xHN/M288xFW/M288xHW only.
4. Special Features
237
Printing features
• The Direct Printing Utility program supports PDF version 1.7 and below.
For higher versions, you must open the file to print it.
13
Using Direct Printing Utility
•
Direct Printing Utility may not be available depending on model or
optional goods (see "Software" on page 7).
• Available for Windows OS users only.
Printing
There are several ways you can print using the Direct Printing Utility.
1
What is Direct Printing Utility?
From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs .
•
For Windows 8, from Charms, select Search > Apps.
Find Samsung Printers > Direct Printing Utility.
To install this program:
2
3
Download the software from the Samsung website then unpack and install it:
(http://www.samsung.com > find your product > Support or Downloads).
4
Select the file you wish to print and click Open.
Direct Printing Utility is a program that sends the PDF files directly to your
machine to print without having to open the file.
Select your machine from the Select Printer drop-down list and click
Browse.
The file is added in the Select Files section.
• Optional memory Mass storage device (HDD) should be installed on your
machine, to print files using this program (see "Variety feature" on page
10).
• You cannot print PDF files that are restricted. Deactivate the printing
restriction feature and retry printing.
5
6
Customize the machine settings for your needs.
Click Print. The selected PDF file is sent to the machine.
• You cannot print PDF files that are restricted by a password. Deactivate
the password feature, and retry printing.
• Whether or not a PDF file can be printed using the Direct Printing Utility
program depends on how the PDF file was created.
4. Special Features
238
Printing features
Using the right-click menu
14
Mac printing
1
Right-click on the PDF file to print and select Direct Printing.
The Direct Printing Utility window appears with the PDF file is added.
2
3
4
Some features may not be available depending on models or options. It
means that the features are not supported.
Select the machine to use.
Customize the machine settings.
Click Print. The selected PDF file is sent to the machine.
Printing a document
When you print with a Mac, you need to check the printer driver settings in each
application you use. Follow the steps below to print from a Mac:
1
2
Open the document to print.
3
Choose your paper size, orientation, scaling, other options, and make
sure that your machine is selected. Click OK.
4
5
6
Open the File menu and click Print.
Open the File menu and click Page Setup (Document Setup in some
applications).
Choose the number of copies and indicate which pages to print.
Click Print.
4. Special Features
239
Printing features
Changing printer settings
Printing on both sides of the paper
You can use advanced printing features when using your machine.
Some features may not be available depending on models or options. It
means that the features are not supported (see "Features by model" on
page 7).
Open an application and select Print from the File menu. The machine name,
which appears in the printer properties window, may differ depending on the
machine in use. Except for the name, the composition of the printer properties
window is similar to the following.
Printing multiple pages on one sheet
You can print more than one page on a single sheet of paper. This feature
provides a cost-effective way to print draft copies.
1
2
3
4
Open an application, and select Print from the File menu.
Select Layout from the drop-down list under Orientation. In the Pages
per Sheet drop-down list, select the number of pages you want to print
on one sheet of paper.
Select the other options to use.
Click Print.
The machine prints the selected number of pages to print on one sheet
of paper.
Before printing in the duplex mode, decide on which edge you will be binding
your finished document. The binding options are, as follows:
•
Long-Edge Binding: This option is the conventional layout used in book
binding.
•
Short-Edge Binding: This option is the type often used with calendars.
1
2
3
4
5
From your Mac application, select Print from the File menu.
Select Layout from the drop-down list under Orientation.
Select a binding orientation from the Two-Sided option.
Select the other options to use.
Click Print and the machine prints on both sides of the paper.
If you print more than 2 copies, the first copy and the second copy might
print on the same sheet of paper. Avoid printing on both sides of paper
when you are printing more than 1 copy.
4. Special Features
240
Printing features
Using help
Printing from applications
Click the question mark on the bottom-left corner of the window and click on
the topic you want to know about. A pop-up window appears with information
about that option's feature, which is provided from the driver.
There are a lot of Linux applications that allow you to print using Common UNIX
Printing System (CUPS). You can print on your machine from any such
application.
1
2
Open the document to print.
Open the File menu and click Page Setup (Print Setup for some
applications).
3
Choose your paper size, orientation, and make
sure that your machine is selected. Click Apply.
15
Linux printing
Some features may not be available depending on models or options. It
means that the features are not supported.
4
5
6
7
8
Open the File menu and click Print.
Select your machine to print.
Choose the number of copies and indicate which pages to print.
Change other printing options in each tab, if necessary.
Click Print.
Automatic/manual duplex printing may not be available depending on
models. You can alternatively use the lpr printing system or other
applications for odd-even printing (see "Features by model" on page 7).
4. Special Features
241
Printing features
Printing files
16
Unix printing
You can print text, image, pdf files on your machine using the standard
CUPS directly from the command line interface. The CUPS lp or lpr utility allows
you to do that. You can print these files by using below command format.
Some features may not be available depending on models or options. It
means that the features are not supported (see "Features by model" on
page 7).
"lp -d <printer name> -o <option> <file name>"
Please refer to lp or lpr man page on your system for more details.
Configuring Printer Properties
You can change the default printing options or connection type with Printing
utility supplied by the OS.
1
2
3
4
Launch Printing utility(Go to System > Administration > Printing
menu or execute "system-config-printer" command in Terminal
program).
Proceeding the print job
After installing the printer, choose any of the image, text, PS or HPGL files to
print.
1
For example, if you are printing “document1”
printui document1
This will open the UNIX Printer Driver Print Job Manager in which the
user can select various print options.
Select your printer and double-click it.
Change the default printing options or connection type.
Click the Apply button.
Execute “printui <file_name_to_print>” command.
2
3
4
Select a printer that has been already added.
Select the printing options from the window such as Page Selection.
Select how many copies are needed in Number of Copies.
4. Special Features
242
Printing features
To take advantage of the printer features provided by your printer driver,
press Properties.
5
Press OK to start the print job.
Automatic/manual duplex printing may not be available depending on
models. You can alternatively use the lpr printing system or other
applications for odd-even printing (see "Features by model" on page 7).
•
Multiple pages: Print several pages on one side of the paper.
•
Page Border: Choose any of the border styles (e.g., Single-line hairline,
Double-line hairline)
Changing the machine settings
The UNIX printer driver Print Job Manager in which the user can select various
print options in printer Properties.
The following hot keys may also be used: “H” for Help, “O” for OK, “A” for Apply,
and “C” for Cancel.
General tab
•
Paper Size: Set the paper size as A4, Letter, or other paper sizes, according
to your requirements.
•
Paper Type: Choose the type of the paper. Options available in the list box
are Printer Default, Plain, and Thick.
•
Paper Source: Select from which tray the paper is used. By default, it is Auto
Selection.
•
Orientation: Select the direction in which information is printed on a page.
•
Duplex: Print on both sides of paper to save paper
Image tab
In this tab, you can change the brightness, resolution, or image position of your
document.
Text tab
Set the character margin, line space, or the columns of the actual print output.
Margins tab
•
Use Margins: Set the margins for the document. By default, margins are not
enabled. The user can change the margin settings by changing the values in
the respective fields. Set by default, these values depend on the page size
selected.
•
Unit: Change the units to points, inches, or centimeters.
4. Special Features
243
Printing features
Printer-Specific Settings tab
Select various options in the JCL and General frames to customize various
settings. These options are specific to the printer and depend on the PPD file.
4. Special Features
244
Scan features
•
TWAIN: TWAIN is one of the preset imaging applications. Scanning an
image launches the selected application, enabling you to control the
scanning process. This feature can be used via the local connection or the
network connection (see "Scanning from image editing program" on page
248).
•
Samsung Easy Document Creator: You can use this program to scan
images or documents. We recommend using scan features with the
Samsung Easy Document Creator program provided in the supplied
sofware CD.
• For basic scanning features, refer to the Basic Guide (see "Basic scanning"
on page 66).
• This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
(see "Features by model" on page 7).
• The maximum resolution that can be achieved depends upon various
factors, including computer speed, available disk space, memory, the
size of the image being scanned, and bit depth settings. Thus,depending
on your system and what you are scanning, you may not be able to scan
at certain resolutions, especially using enhanced dpi.
•
17
Basic scanning method
See "Using Samsung Easy Document Creator" on page 269.
WIA: WIA stands for Windows Images Acquisition. To use this feature, your
computer must be connected directly with the machine via an USB cable
(see "Scanning using the WIA driver" on page 249).
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
(see "Variety feature" on page 10).
You can scan the originals with your machine via a USB cable or the network. The
following methodoloqies can be used for scanning your documents:
•
Scan to PC: Scan the originals from the control panel. Then, the scanned
data will be stored in the connected computers My Documents folder (see
"Basic Scanning" on page 66).
4. Special Features
245
Scan features
18
19
Setting the scan settings in the computer
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
(see "Features by model" on page 7).
1
Open Samsung Easy Printer Manager (see "Using Samsung Easy
Printer Manager" on page 270).
2
3
4
Select the appropriate machine from the Printer List.
Make sure the printer driver is installed on your computer using the software CD,
since the printer driver includes the scan program (see "Installing the driver
locally" on page 29).
1
Place a single document (see "Loading originals" on page 52).
2
Select
Select Scan to PC Settings menu.
Select the option you want.
•
Scan Activation: Determines whether or not scanning is enabled on
the device.
•
Profile: Displays the scanning profiles saved on the selected device.
•
Basic tab: Contains settings related to general scan and device
settings.
•
5
Scanning from network connected machine
Image tab: Contains settings related to image altering.
(Scan) > Scan to PC > Network PC on the control panel.
Or select Scan to button > Scan to PC > Network PC on the control
panel.
Press Save > OK.
If you see Not Available message, check the port connection.
4. Special Features
246
Scan features
3
Select your registered computer ID, and enter the Password if
necessary.
20
• ID is the same ID as the registered scan ID for Samsung Easy Printer
Scans the originals and saves the scanned data on a connected computer if the
computer supports the WSD (Web Service for Device) feature. To use the WSD
feature, you need to install the WSD printer driver on your computer. For
Windows 7, you can install the WSD driver by Control Panel > Devices and
Printers > Add a printer. Click Add a network printer from the wizard.
Manager >
Switch to advanced mode > Scan to PC Settings.
• Password is the 4 digit number registered password for Samsung Easy
Printer Manager >
Switch to advanced mode > Scan to PC
Scanning to WSD
Settings.
• The machine that does not support the network interface, it will not be
able to use this feature (see "Features by model" on page 7).
4
5
Select the option you want and press OK.
• The WSD feature works only with Windows Vista® or later version that are
the WSD-compliant computer.
Scanning begins.
Scanned image is saved in computer’s C:\Users\users
name\Pictures\folder. The saved folder may differ, depending on your
operating system or the application you are using.
• The following installation steps are based on Windows 7 computer.
Installing a WSD Printer Driver
1
2
3
Select Start > Control Panel > Devices and Printers > Add a printer.
Click Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer from the wizard.
In the printers list, select the one you want to use, and then click Next.
4. Special Features
247
Scan features
6
• The IP address for WSD printer is http://IP address/ws/ (example: http://
111.111.111.111/ws/).
Scanning begins.
21
• If no WSD printer is displayed in the list, click The printer that I want
isn't listed > Add a printer using a TCP/IP address or hostname and
select Web Services Device from Device type. Then enter the printer's
IP address.
4
Follow the instructions in the installation window.
Scanning using the WSD feature
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
2
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder (see Loading originals).
3
Select
Scanning from image editing program
You can scan and import documents in the image editing software or using
image editing software such as Adobe Photoshop, if the software is TWAINcompliant. Follow the steps below to scan with TWAIN-compliant software:
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
2
Place a single document (see "Loading originals" on page 52).
3
Open an application, such as Adobe Photoshop.
(Scan) > Scan to WSD on the control panel.
If you see Not Available message, check the port connection. Or check the
printer driver for WSD is correctly installed.
4
5
Select your computer name from Destination List.
Select the option you want and press OK.
4. Special Features
248
Scan features
4
5
6
Click File > Import, and select the scanner device.
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
2
Place a single document (see "Loading originals" on page 52).
3
Click Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Devices and
Printers.
4
5
6
Right-click on device driver icon in Printers and Faxes > Start Scan.
7
Scan and save your scanned image.
Set the scan options.
Scan and save your scanned image.
22
Scanning using the WIA driver
Your machine supports the Windows Image Acquisition (WIA) driver for
scanning images. WIA is one of the standard components provided by Microsoft
Windows 7 and works with digital cameras and scanners. Unlike the TWAIN
driver, the WIA driver allows you to scan and easily adjust images without using
additional software:
The WIA driver works only on Windows OS with a USB port.
New Scan application appears.
Choose your scanning preferences and click Preview to see your
preferences affect the picture.
4. Special Features
249
Scan features
Scanning from network connected machine
23
Mac scanning
Network or wireless model only (see "Features by model" on page 7).
Scanning from USB connected machine
1
2
3
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on
page 52).
Start Applications and click Image Capture.
1
2
Make sure that your machine is connected to a network.
3
4
Start Applications and click Image Capture.
•
Select the option you want.
Scan and save your scanned image.
If scanning does not operate in Image Capture, update Mac OS to the latest
version.
According to OS, follow steps below.
•
If No Image Capture device connected message appears, disconnect the
USB cable and reconnect it. If the problem continues, refer to the Image
Capture’s help.
4
5
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on
page 52).
5
6
For 10.5
-
Click Devices > Browse Devices on Menu bar.
-
Make sure that Connected checkbox is checked beside your
machine in Bonjour Devices.
For 10.6-10.9, select your device below SHARED.
Set the scan options on this program.
Scan and save your scanned image.
4. Special Features
250
Scan features
• If scanning does not operate in Image Capture, update Mac OS to the
latest version.
• For more information, refer to the Image Capture’s help.
• You can also scan using TWAIN-compliant software, such as Adobe
Photoshop.
• You can scan using Samsung Scan Assistant software. Open the
Applications folder > Samsung folder > Samsung Scan Assistant.
24
Linux scanning
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
2
Launch a scan application such as xsane or simple-scan(If it's not
installed, please install it manually to use scan features. For example, you
may use "yum install xsane" for rpm package systems and "apt-get install
xsane" for deb package systems to install xsane).
3
4
Select your device from the list and set the scan options to apply.
Click the Scan button.
4. Special Features
251
Fax features
26
• For basic faxing features, refer to the Basic Guide (see "Basic faxing" on
page 67).
•
Redialing the fax number
M267xN/M287xND/M287xDW does not support fax features.
1
2
25
(Redial/Pause) button on the control panel.
Select the fax number you want.
Ten recently sent fax numbers with ten received Caller IDs are shown.
Automatic redialing
3
When the number you have dialed is busy or there is no answer when you send
a fax, the machine automatically redials the number. The redial time depends on
the country's factory default setting.
When the display shows Retry Redial?, press
Press
If an original is placed on the scanner glass, select Yes to add another
page. Load another original and press OK. When you have finished,
select No when Another Page? appears.
(Start) button to redial the
number without waiting. To cancel the automatic redialing, press
Clear).
(Stop/
When an original is loaded in the document feeder, the machine
automatically begins to send.
27
Confirming a transmission
To change the time interval between redials and the number of redial attempts.
1
Press
panel.
(fax) >
(Menu)> Fax Setup > Sending on the control
2
3
Select Redial Times or Redial Term you want.
When the last page of your original has been sent successfully, the machine
beeps and returns to ready mode.
When something goes wrong while sending your fax, an error message appears
on the display. If you receive an error message, press
the message and try to send the fax again.
(Stop/Clear) to clear
Select the option you want.
4. Special Features
252
Fax features
4
5
You can set your machine to print a confirmation report automatically each
time sending a fax is completed. Press
(fax) >
(Menu) > System
Setup > Report > Fax Confirm. on the control panel.
Click Print or OK.
Enter the recipients’ numbers and select the option
Select the Help button from the window and click on any option you want
to know about.
28
Sending a fax in the computer
6
Click Send.
29
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
(see "Features by model" on page 7).
You can send a fax from your computer without going to the machine.
To send a fax from your computer, the Samsung Network PC Fax program
must be installed. This program will be installed when you installed the printer
driver.
1
2
Open the document to be sent.
Select Print from the File menu.
The Print window will be displayed. It may look slightly different
depending on your application.
3
Select Samsung Network PC Fax from the Print window
Delaying a fax transmission
You can set your machine to send a fax at a later time when you will not be
present. You cannot send a color fax using this feature.
1
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder.
2
3
4
5
6
Press
(fax) on the control panel.
Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs.
Press
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Delay Send on the control panel.
Enter the number of the receiving fax machine and press OK.
The display asks you to enter another fax number to send the document.
4. Special Features
253
Fax features
7
To enter more fax numbers, press OK when Yes highlights and repeat
steps 5.
1
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder.
• Once you entered a group dial number, you cannot enter another group
dial numbers anymore.
2
Press
panel.
Enter the job name and the time.
3
Select the fax job and press OK.
• You can add up to 10 destinations.
8
If you set a time earlier than the current time, the fax will be sent at that time
on the following day.
9
Adding documents to a reserved fax
The original is scanned into memory before transmission.
The machine returns to ready mode. The display reminds you that you
are in ready mode and that a delayed fax is set.
You can check the list of delayed fax jobs.
Press
(Menu) > System Setup > Report > Schduled Jobs on the
control panel.
(fax) >
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Add Pages on the control
When you have finished, select No when Another Page? appears. The
machine scans the original into memory.
4
Press
(Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode.
Canceling a reserved fax job
1
Press
panel.
(fax) >
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Cancel Job on the control
2
3
Select the fax job you want and press OK.
Press OK when Yes highlights.
The selected fax is deleted from memory.
4
Press
(Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode.
4. Special Features
254
Fax features
30
31
Sending a priority fax
This function is used when a high priority fax need to be sent ahead of reserved
operations. The original is scanned into memory and immediately transmitted
when the current operation is finished.
1
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder.
2
Press
(Fax) >
control panel.
3
4
5
Enter the destination fax number and press OK.
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Priority Send on the
Forwarding a sent fax to another destination
You can set the machine to forward the sent fax to other destination by a fax. If
you are out of office but have to receive the fax, this feature may be useful.
• Though you sent or received a color fax, the data is forwarded in
grayscale.
1
Place a single document (see "Loading originals" on page 52).
2
Press
(fax) >
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Send Forward > Forward
to Fax > On on the control panel.
Enter the job name and press OK.
If an original is placed on the scanner glass, select Yes to add another
pages. Load another original and press OK.
When you have finished, select No when Another Page? appears.
The machine starts to scan and send a fax to destinations.
4. Special Features
255
Fax features
32
Forward options may not be available depending on model or optional
goods (see "Variety feature" on page 10).
3
4
Enter the destination fax number and press OK.
Press
Forwarding a received fax
You can set the machine to forward the received fax to other destination by a fax
or a PC. If you are out of office but have to receive the fax, this feature may be
useful.
(Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode.
Subsequent sent faxes will be forwarded to the specified fax machine.
Though you sent or received a color fax, the data is forwarded in grayscale.
1
Press
(fax) >
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Rcv. Forward > Forward
to Fax, or Forward to PC > On on the control panel.
Forward options may not be available depending on model or optional
goods (see "Variety feature" on page 10).
2
To set the machine to print out a fax when fax forwarding has been
completed, select Forward & Print.
3
4
5
Enter the destination fax number and press OK.
Enter the starting tim and ending time, then press OK.
Press
(Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode.
Subsequent sent faxes will be forwarded to the specified fax machine.
4. Special Features
256
Fax features
33
Changing the receive modes
This setting may not be available depending on your country.
1
Press
(fax) >
(Menu) > Fax Setup > Receiving > Receive Mode
on the control panel.
2
Select the option you want.
•
•
•
Fax: Answers an incoming fax call and immediately goes into the fax
reception mode.
Tel: Receives a fax by pressing
3
4
Press OK.
Press
(Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode.
34
Receiving manually in Tel mode
(On Hook Dial) and then
(Start)
You can receive a fax call by pressing
Ans/Fax: Is for when an answering machine attached to your
machine. Your machine answers an incoming call, and the caller can
leave a message on the answering machine. If the fax machine
senses a fax tone on the line, the machine automatically switches to
Fax mode to receive the fax.
pressing
(On Hook Dial) button and then
(Start) when you hear a fax tone. If your machine has a handset,
you can answer calls using the handset (see "Features by model" on page 7).
35
Receiving in Answering Machine/Fax mode
To use the Ans/Fax mode, attach an answering machine to the EXT socket
on the back of your machine.
•
DRPD: you can receive a call using the Distinctive Ring Pattern
Detection (DRPD) feature. Distinctive Ring is a telephone company
service which enables an user to use a single telephone line to
answer several different telephone numbers. For further details, see
"Receiving faxes using DRPD mode" on page 258.
To use this mode, you must attach an answering machine to the EXT socket on
the back of your machine. If the caller leaves a message, the answering machine
stores the message. If your machine detects a fax tone on the line, it
automatically starts to receive the fax.
4. Special Features
257
Fax features
37
• If you have set your machine to this mode and your answering machine
is switched off, or no answering machine is connected to EXT socket,
your machine automatically goes into Fax mode after a predefined
number of rings.
• If the answering machine has a user-selectable ring counter, set the
machine to answer incoming calls within 1 ring.
• If the machine is in Tel mode, disconnect or switch off the answering
machine with the fax machine. Otherwise, the outgoing message from
the answering machine will interrupt your phone conversation.
Receiving faxes using DRPD mode
Distinctive Ring is a telephone company service which enables an user to use a
single telephone line to answer several different telephone numbers. This
feature is often used by answering services who answer telephones for many
different clients and need to know which number someone is calling in on to
properly answer the phone.
1
Select
(fax) >
(Menu) > Fax Setup > Receiving > DRPD >
Waiting Ring on the control panel.
2
3
Call your fax number from another telephone.
36
Receiving faxes with an extension telephone
When you are using an extension telephone connected to the EXT socket, you
can receive a fax from someone you are talking to on the extension telephone,
without going to the fax machine.
When you receive a call on the extension phone and hear fax tones, press the
keys *9* on the extension phone. The machine receives the fax.
*9* is the remote receive code preset at the factory. The first and the last
asterisks are fixed, but you can change the middle number to whatever you
want.
While you are talking over the telephone connected to the EXT socket, copy
and scan features are not available.
When your machine begins to ring, do not answer the call. The machine
requires several rings to learn the pattern.
When the machine completes learning, the display shows Completed
DRPD Setup. If the DRPD setup fails, Error DRPD Ring appears.
4
Press OK when DRPD appears and start over from step 2.
• DRPD must be set up again if you re-assign your fax number, or connect
the machine to another telephone line.
• After DRPD has been set up, call your fax number again to verify that the
machine answers with a fax tone. Then have a call placed to a different
number assigned to that same line to be sure the call is forwarded to the
extension telephone or answering machine plugged into the EXT socket.
4. Special Features
258
Fax features
38
39
Receiving in secure receiving mode
Printing faxes on both sides of the paper
• Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
(see "Features by model" on page 7).
• This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
(see "Features by model" on page 7).
You may need to prevent your received faxes from being accessed by
unauthorized people. Turn on secure receiving mode, then all incoming faxes
go into memory. You can print the incoming faxes by entering the password.
To use the secure receiving mode, activate the menu from
(fax) >
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Secure Receive on the control panel.
1
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder.
2
Press
(fax) >
(Menu) > Fax Setup > Receiving > Duplex Print
on the control panel.
•
Off: Prints in Normal mode.
•
Long Edge: Prints pages to be read like a book.
•
Short Edge: Prints pages to be read by flipping like a note pad.
Printing received faxes
1
2
3
Select
(fax) >
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Secure Receive > Print
on the control panel.
Enter a four-digit password and press OK.
2
The machine prints all of the faxes stored in memory.
3
5
4. Special Features
259
Fax features
3
4
Press OK.
Press
(Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode.
40
Receiving faxes in memory
Since your machine is a multi-tasking device, it can receive faxes while you are
making copies or printing. If you receive a fax while you are copying or printing,
your machine stores incoming faxes in its memory. Then, as soon as you finish
copying or printing, the machine automatically prints the fax.
If fax is received and being printed, other copy and print jobs cannot be
processed at the same time.
41
Printing sent fax report automatically
You can set the machine to print a report with detailed information about the
previous 50 communication operations, including time and dates.
1
Press
(fax) >
the control panel.
2
Press
(Menu) > System Setup > Report > Fax Sent on
(Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode.
4. Special Features
260
5. Useful Management
Tools
This chapter introduces management tools provided to help you make full use of your machine.
• Accessing management tools
262
• Easy Capture Manager
263
• Samsung AnyWeb Print
264
• Easy Eco Driver
265
• Using SyncThru™ Web Service
266
• Using Samsung Easy Document Creator
269
• Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager
270
• Using Samsung Printer Status
273
• Using Samsung Printer Experience
275
Accessing management tools
Samsung provides a variety of management tools for Samsung printers.
1
2
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on.
From the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs.
•
3
4
5
For Windows 8, from the Charms, select Search > Apps.
Find Samsung Printers.
Under Samsung Printers, you can see installed management tools.
Click the management tool you want to use.
• After installing the driver, for some management tools, you can access them directly from the Start menu > Programs or All Programs.
• For Windows 8, after installing the driver, for some management tools, you can access them directly from the Start screen by clicking on the corresponding tile.
5. Useful Management Tools
262
Easy Capture Manager
• Available for Windows OS users only.
• This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods (see "Software" on page 7).
Capture your screen and launch Easy Capture Manager by simply pressing the Print Screen key. Now you can easily print your captured screen as captured or edited.
5. Useful Management Tools
263
Samsung AnyWeb Print
• This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods (see "Software" on page 7).
• Available for Windows OS users only.
This tool helps you screen-capture, preview, scrap, and print Windows Internet Explorer pages more easily than when you use an ordinary program. Download the
software from the Samsung website then unpack and install it: (http://www. samsung.com > find your product > Support or Downloads).
5. Useful Management Tools
264
Easy Eco Driver
• This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods (see "Software" on page 7).
• Available for Windows OS users only (see "Software" on page 7).
With the Easy Eco Driver, you can apply Eco features to save paper and toner before printing.
Easy Eco Driver also allows you simple editing such as removing images and texts, and more. You can save frequently used settings as a preset.
How to use:
1 Open a document to print.
2 Open printing preference window (see "Opening printing preferences" on page 57).
3 From the Favorites tab, select Eco Printing Preview.
4 Click OK > Print in the window.
A preview window appears.
5 Select the options you want to apply to the document.
You can see the preview of the applied features.
6 Click Print.
If you want to run Easy Eco Driver every time you print, check Start Easy Eco Driver before printing job checkbox in the Basic tab of the printing preference
window.
5. Useful Management Tools
265
Using SyncThru™ Web Service
1
2
• Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher is the minimum requirement for
SyncThru™ Web Service.
• SyncThru™ Web Service explanation in this user’s guide may differ from
your machine depending on its options or models.
• Network model only (see "Software" on page 7).
Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru™ Web Service website.
Type in the ID and Password then click Login.
•
ID: admin
•
Password: sec00000
2
SyncThru™ Web Service overview
1
Accessing SyncThru™ Web Service
1
Access a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows.
Enter the machine IP address of your printer (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in
the address field and press the Enter key or click Go.
2
Some tabs may not appear depending on your model.
Your machine’s embedded website opens.
Logging into SyncThru™ Web Service
Before configuring options in SyncThru™ Web Service, you need to log-in as an
administrator. You can still use SyncThru™ Web Service without logging in but
you won’t have access to Settings tab and Security tab.
Information tab
This tab gives you general information about your machine. You can check
things, such as remaining amount of toner. You can also print reports, such as an
error report.
•
Active Alerts: Shows the alerts that have occurred in the machine and their
severity.
•
Supplies: Shows how many pages are printed and amount of toner left in
the cartridge.
5. Useful Management Tools
266
Using SyncThru™ Web Service
•
Usage Counters: Shows the usage count by print types: simplex and
duplex.
Maintenance tab
•
Current Settings: Shows the machine’s and network’s information.
•
Print information: Prints reports such as system related reports, e-mail
address, and font reports.
This tab allows you to maintain your machine by upgrading firmware and
setting contact information for sending emails. You can also connect to
Samsung website or download drivers by selecting the Link menu.
Settings tab
•
Firmware Upgrade: Upgrade your machine’s firmware.
•
Contact Information: Shows the contact information.
•
Link: Shows links to useful sites where you can download or check
information.
This tab allows you to set configurations provided by your machine and
network. You need to log-in as an administrator to view this tab.
3
•
Machine Settings tab: Sets options provided by your machine.
•
Network Settings tab: Shows options for the network environment. Sets
options such as TCP/IP and network protocols.
Security tab
This tab allows you to set system and network security information. You need to
log-in as an administrator to view this tab.
•
•
System Security: Sets the system administrator’s information and also
enables or disables machine features.
E-mail notification setup
You can receive emails about your machine’s status by setting this option. By
setting information such as IP address, host name, e-mail address and SMTP
server information, the machine status (toner cartridge shortage or machine
error) will be sent to a certain person's e-mail automatically. This option may be
used more frequently by a machine administrator.
1
Start a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows.
Enter the machine IP address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address field
and press the Enter key or click Go.
Network Security: Sets settings for IPSec, and IPv4/IPv6 filtering.
2
3
Your machine’s embedded website opens.
From the Settings tab, select Machine Settings > E-mail Notification.
5. Useful Management Tools
267
Using SyncThru™ Web Service
If you have not configured outgoing server environment, go to Settings >
Network Settings > Outgoing Mail Server(SMTP) to configure network
environment before setting e-mail notification.
4
5
Select Enable check box to use the E-mail Notification.
Click Add button to add e-mail notification user.
Set the recipient name and e-mail address(es) with notification items
you want to receive an alert for.
6
Click Apply.
1
Start a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows.
Enter the machine IP address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address field
and press the Enter key or click Go.
2
3
4
Your machine’s embedded website opens.
5
Click Apply.
From the Security tab, select System Security > System Administrator
Enter the name of the administrator, phone number, location, and email
address.
If the firewall is activated, the e-mail may not be sent successfully. In that
case, contact a network administrator.
4
Setting the system administrator’s information
This setting is necessary for using the e-mail notification option.
5. Useful Management Tools
268
Using Samsung Easy Document Creator
Samsung Easy Document Creator is an application to help users scan, compile,
and save documents in multiple formats, including .epub format. These
documents can be shared via social networking sites or fax. Whether you’re a
student needing to organize research from the library or a stay-at-home mom
sharing scanned pictures from last year’s birthday party, Samsung Easy
Document Creator will provide you with the necessary tools.
The Samsung Easy Document Creator provides features below:
•
Image Scanning: Use for scanning single or mulitple pictures.
•
Document Scanning: Use for scanning documents with text or text and
images.
•
Text Converting: Use for scanning documents that need to be saved in an
editable text format.
•
Book Scanning: Use for scanning books with the flatbed scanner.
•
SNS Upload: Provides an easy and quick way to upload scanned image or
existing images to a variety of social networking sites (SNS).
•
E-Book Conversion: Provides the ability to scan multiple documents in as
one e-book or convert existing files into an e-book format.
•
Plug-in: Scan, fax, and convert to E-Book directly from the Microsoft Office
program.
Click the Help ( ) button from the window and click on any option you
want to know about.
5. Useful Management Tools
269
Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager
• This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
(see "Software" on page 7).
• Available for Windows and Mac OS users only (see "Software" on page 7).
• For Windows, Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher is the minimum
requirement for Samsung Easy Printer Manager.
Open the Applications folder > Samsung folder > Samsung Easy Printer
Manager.
The Samsung Easy Printer Manager interface is comprised of various basic
sections as described in the table that follows:
The screenshot may differ depending on the operating system you are
using.
Samsung Easy Printer Manager is an application that combines Samsung
machine settings into one location. Samsung Easy Printer Manager combines
device settings as well as printing environments, settings/actions and
launching. All of these features provide a gateway to conveniently use your
Samsung machine. Samsung Easy Printer Manager provides two different user
interfaces for the user to choose from: the basic user interface and the advanced
user interface. Switching between the two interfaces is easy: just click a button.
5
Understanding Samsung Easy Printer Manager
To open the program:
For Windows,
Select Start > Programs or All Programs > Samsung Printers > Samsung
Easy Printer Manager > Samsung Easy Printer Manager.
•
For Windows 8, from Charms, select Search > Apps> Samsung Printers >
Samsung Easy Printer Manager > Samsung Easy Printer Manager.
Printer list
1
The Printer List displays printers installed on your
computer and network printers added by network
discovery (Windows only).
For Mac,
5. Useful Management Tools
270
Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager
Printer
information
2
This area gives you general information about your
machine. You can check information, such as the machine’s
model name, IP address (or Port name), and machine
status.
Quick links
4
If you connect your machine to a network, the
SyncThru™ Web Service icon is enabled.
You can view the online User’s Guide.
Troubleshooting button: This button opens the
Troubleshooting Guide when an error occurs.
You can directly open the necessary section in the
user’s guide.
Application
information
3
Displays Quick links to machine specific functions. This
section also includes links to applications in the advanced
settings.
Contents area
Displays information about the selected machine,
remaining toner level, and paper. The information will vary
based on the machine selected. Some machines do not
have this feature.
Order supplies
Click on the Order button from the supply ordering
window. You can order replacement toner cartridge(s)
from online.
5
Includes links for changing to the advanced settings,
preference, help, and about.
6
The
button is used to change the user
interface to the advanced settings user interface
(see "Advanced settings user interface overview"
on page 271).
Select the Help menu or click the
button from the window and click on
any option you want to know about.
6
Advanced settings user interface overview
The advanced user interface is intended to be used by the person responsible
for managing the network and machines.
5. Useful Management Tools
271
Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager
Fax to PC Settings
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.
Device Settings
This menu includes settings related to the basic fax functionality of the selected
device.
•
Disable: If Disable is On, incoming faxes will not be received on this device.
•
Enable Fax Receiving from Device: Enables faxing on the device and
allows more options to be set.
You can configure various machine settings such as machine setup, paper,
layout, emulation, network, and print information.
Alert Settings (Windows only)
Scan to PC Settings
This menu includes settings related to error alerting.
This menu includes settings to create or delete scan to PC profiles.
•
Printer Alert: Provides settings related to when alerts will be received.
•
•
Email Alert: Provides options relating to receiving alerts via email.
•
Alert History: Provides a history of device and toner related alerts.
Scan Activation: Determines whether or not scanning is enabled on the
device.
•
Basic tab: Contains general scan and device settings.
•
Image tab: Contains settings related to image altering.
Job Accounting
Provides querying of quota information of the specified job accounting user.
This quota information can be created and applied to devices by job accounting
software such as SyncThru™ or CounThru™ admin software.
5. Useful Management Tools
272
Using Samsung Printer Status
The Samsung Printer Status is a program that monitors and informs you of the
machine status.
Icon
• The Samsung Printer Status window and its contents shown in this user’s
guide may differ depending on the machine or operating system in use.
Mean
Normal
The machine is in ready mode and experiencing no
errors or warnings.
Warning
The machine is in a state where an error might occur in
the future. For example, it might be in toner low status,
which may lead to toner empty status.
Error
The machine has at least one error.
• Check the operating system(s) that are compatible with your machine
(see "Specifications" on page 116).
• Available for Windows OS users only (see "Software" on page 7).
Description
7
Samsung Printer Status overview
If an error occurs while operating, you can check the error from the Samsung
Printer Status. Samsung Printer Status is installed automatically when you install
the machine software.
You can also launch Samsung Printer Status manually. Go to the Printing
Preferences, click the Basic tab > Printer Status button.
These icons appear on the Windows task bar:
Toner Level
You can view the level of toner remaining in each
toner cartridge. The machine and the number of
toner cartridge(s) shown in the above window may
differ depending on the machine in use. Some
machines do not have this feature.
Option
You can set printing job alert related settings.
1
2
5. Useful Management Tools
273
Using Samsung Printer Status
3
Order Supplies
You can order replacement toner cartridge(s) from
online.
User’s Guide
You can view the online User’s Guide.
This button opens the Troubleshooting
Guide when an error occurs. You can directly
open the troubleshooting section in the
user’s guide.
4
5
Close
Close the window.
5. Useful Management Tools
274
Using Samsung Printer Experience
Samsung Printer Experience is a Samsung application that combines
Samsung machine settings and machine management into one location. You
can set device settings, order supplies, open troubleshooting guides, visit
Samsung’s web site, and check connected machine information. This
application will be automatically downloaded from the Windows Store if the
machine is connected to a computer with an Internet connection.
The screenshot may differ depending on the model you are using.
1
8
2
6
Understanding the Samsung Printer Experience
3
To open the application,
From the Start screen, select the Samsung Printer Experience (
tile.
4
5
)
The Samsung Printer Experience interface comprises various useful features as
described in the following table:
1
Printer
Information
This area gives you general information about your
machine. You can check information, such as the
machine’s status, location, IP address, and remaining
toner level.
5. Useful Management Tools
275
Using Samsung Printer Experience
9
2
User Guide
You can view the online User’s Guide. You need to be
connected to the Internet to use this feature.
This button opens the Troubleshooting Guide
when an error occurs. You can directly open the
troubleshooting section in the user’s guide.
Adding/Deleting Printers
If you do not have any printer added to the Samsung Printer Experience, or if
you want to add/delete a printer, follow the instructions below.
You can only add/delete network connected printers.
3
4
Order
Supplies
Visit Samsung
Printer Settings
5
Device List &
Latest Scanned
Image
6
Click on this button to order replacement toner
cartridges online. You need to be connected to the
Internet to use this feature.
Links to Samsung printer website. You need to be
connected to the Internet to use this feature.
You can configure various machine settings such as
machine setup, paper, layout, emulation, networking,
and print information through SyncThru™ Web Service.
Your machine needs to be connected to a network. This
button will be disabled if your machine is connected via
USB cable.
The scan list displays devices that supports Samsung
Printer Experience. Under the device, you can see the
latest scanned images. Your machine needs to be
connected to a network to scan from here.
Adding a printer
1
From the Charms, select Settings.
Or, right-click the Samsung Printer Experience page and select
Settings.
2
3
Select Add Printer
Select the printer you want to add.
You can see the added printer.
If you see
mark, you can also click
mark to add printers.
This section is for the users with multi-functional
printers.
5. Useful Management Tools
276
Using Samsung Printer Experience
Deleting a printer
1
From the Charms, select Settings.
4
5
Select the printer settings, such as the number of copies and orientation.
Click the Print button to start the print job.
Or, right-click the Samsung Printer Experience page and select
Settings.
2
3
4
Select Remove Printer
Select the printer you want to delete.
Click Yes.
You can see that the deleted printer is removed from the screen.
10
Printing from Windows 8
This section explains common printing tasks from the Start screen.
Basic printing
1
2
3
Open the document to print.
From the Charms, select Devices.
Select your printer from the list
5. Useful Management Tools
277
Using Samsung Printer Experience
Cancelling a print job
Basic tab
If the printing job is waiting in the print queue or print spooler, cancel the job as
follows:
•
You can access this window by simply double-clicking the machine icon
(
•
) in the Windows task bar.
You can also cancel the current job by pressing
the control panel.
(Stop/Clear) button on
Opening more settings
The screen may appear somewhat different depending on the model or
options.
You can set up more printing parameters.
1
2
3
4
Open the document you want to print.
Basic
This option allows you to choose the basic printing settings such as copies,
orientation, and document type.
Eco settings
This option allows you to choose multiple pages per side to save media.
From the Charms, select Devices.
Select your printer from the list
Click More settings.
5. Useful Management Tools
278
Using Samsung Printer Experience
Advanced tab
Security tab
Some features may not be available depending on the model or options. If
this tab is not shown or disabled, it means that these features are not
supported.
Paper settings
This option allows you to set the basic paper handling specifications.
Layout settings
This option allows you to set the various ways to layout your documents.
Job Accounting
This option allows you to print with the given permission.
Confidential Printing
This option is used for printing confidential documents. You need to enter a
password to print using it.
5. Useful Management Tools
279
Using Samsung Printer Experience
11
Scanning from Windows 8
This section is for the users with multi-functional printers.
7
Click Scan (
)and save the image.
• When you place the originals in the ADF (or DADF), Prescan (
available.
) is not
• You can skip step 5, if the Prescan option is selected.
Scanning with your machine lets you turn pictures and text into digital files that
can be stored on your computer.
Scanning from Samsung Printer Experience
The most frequently used printing menus are displayed for quick scanning.
1
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder.
2
3
4
Click the Samsung Printer Experience tile on the Start screen.
5
6
Click Prescan (
Click Scan (
).
Set up the scanning parameters such as image type, document size, and
resolution.
)to check the image.
Adjust the prescanned image with scanning operation functions such as
rotate and mirror.
5. Useful Management Tools
280
6. Troubleshooting
This chapter gives helpful information for what to do if you encounter an error.
• Paper feeding problems
282
• Power and cable connecting problems
283
• Printing problems
284
• Printing quality problems
288
• Copying problems
296
• Scanning problems
297
• Faxing problems
299
• Operating system problems
301
Paper feeding problems
Condition
Suggested solutions
Paper jams during printing.
Clear the paper jam.
Paper sticks together.
• Check the maximum paper capacity of the tray.
• Make sure that you are using the correct type of paper.
• Remove paper from the tray and flex or fan the paper.
• Humid conditions may cause some paper to stick together.
Multiple sheets of paper do not feed.
Different types of paper may be stacked in the tray. Load paper of only one type, size, and weight.
Paper does not feed into the machine.
• Remove any obstructions from inside the machine.
• Paper has not been loaded correctly. Remove paper from the tray and reload it correctly.
• There is too much paper in the tray. Remove excess paper from the tray.
• The paper is too thick. Use only paper that meets the specifications required by the machine.
The paper keeps jamming.
• There is too much paper in the tray. Remove excess paper from the tray. If you are printing on special materials, use the
manual feeding in tray.
• An incorrect type of paper is being used. Use only paper that meets the specifications required by the machine.
• There may be debris inside the machine. Open the front cover and remove any debris.
Transparencies stick together in the paper
exit.
Use only transparencies specifically designed for laser printers. Remove each transparency as it exits from the machine.
Envelopes skew or fail to feed correctly.
Ensure that the paper guides are against both sides of the envelopes.
6. Troubleshooting
282
Power and cable connecting problems
Condition
The machine is not receiving power,
or the connection cable between the
computer and the machine is not
connected properly.
Suggested solutions
• Connect the machine to the electricity supply first. If the machine has a
(Power/Wake Up) button on the control,
press it.
• Disconnect the machine’s cable and reconnect it.
6. Troubleshooting
283
Printing problems
Condition
The machine does not
print.
Possible cause
The machine is not receiving power.
Suggested solutions
Connect the machine to the electricity supply first. If the machine has a
(Power/
Wake Up) button on the control, press it.
The machine is not selected as the default
machine.
Select your machine as your default machine in Windows.
Check the machine for the following:
• The cover is not closed. Close the cover.
• Paper is jammed. Clear the paper jam (see "Clearing paper jams" on page 99).
• No paper is loaded. Load paper (see "Loading paper in the tray" on page 42).
• The toner cartridge is not installed. Install the toner cartridge (see "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 79).
• Make sure the protect cover and sheets are removed from the toner cartridge (see "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 79).
If a system error occurs, contact your service representative.
The connection cable between the computer and
the machine is not connected properly.
Disconnect the machine cable and reconnect it (see "Rear view" on page 23).
The connection cable between the computer and
the machine is defective.
If possible, attach the cable to another computer that is working properly and print a job.
You can also try using a different machine cable.
The port setting is incorrect.
Check the Windows printer settings to make sure that the print job is sent to the correct
port. If the computer has more than one port, make sure that the machine is attached to
the correct one.
6. Troubleshooting
284
Printing problems
Condition
The machine does not
print.
Possible cause
Suggested solutions
The machine may be configured incorrectly.
Check the Printing Preferences to ensure that all of the print settings are correct.
The printer driver may be incorrectly installed.
Uninstall and reinstall the machine’s driver.
The machine is malfunctioning.
Check the display message on the control panel to see if the machine is indicating a
system error. Contact a service representative.
The document size is so big that the hard disk
space of the computer is insufficient to access the
print job.
Get more hard disk space and print the document again.
The output tray is full.
Once the paper is removed from the output tray, the machine resumes printing.
The machine selects print
materials from the wrong
paper source.
The paper option that was selected in the
Printing Preferences may be incorrect.
For many software applications, the paper source selection is found under the Paper tab
within the Printing Preferences (see "Opening printing preferences" on page 57).
Select the correct paper source. See the printer driver help screen (see "Using help" on
page 58).
A print job is extremely
slow.
The job may be very complex.
Reduce the complexity of the page or try adjusting the print quality settings.
Half the page is blank.
The page orientation setting may be incorrect.
Change the page orientation in your application (see "Opening printing preferences" on
page 57). See the printer driver help screen (see "Using help" on page 58).
The paper size and the paper size settings do not
match.
Ensure that the paper size in the printer driver settings matches the paper in the tray.
The machine cable is loose or defective.
Disconnect the machine cable and reconnect. Try a print job that you have already
printed successfully. If possible, attach the cable and the machine to another computer
that you know works and try a print job. Finally, try a new machine cable.
The machine prints, but
the text is wrong,
garbled, or incomplete.
Or, ensure that the paper size in the printer driver settings matches the paper selection
in the software application settings you use (see "Opening printing preferences" on
page 57).
6. Troubleshooting
285
Printing problems
Condition
Pages print, but they are
blank.
Possible cause
Suggested solutions
The wrong printer driver was selected.
Check the application’s printer selection menu to ensure that your machine is selected.
The software application is malfunctioning.
Try printing a job from another application.
The operating system is malfunctioning.
Exit Windows and reboot the computer. Turn the machine off and back on again.
The toner cartridge is defective or out of toner.
Redistribute the toner, if necessary.
If necessary, replace the toner cartridge.
• See "Redistributing toner" on page 76.
• See "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 79.
The file may have blank pages.
Check the file to ensure that it does not contain blank pages.
Some parts, such as the controller or the board,
may be defective.
Contact a service representative.
The machine does not
print PDF files correctly.
Some parts of graphics,
text, or illustrations are
missing.
Incompatibility between the PDF file and the
Acrobat products.
Printing the PDF file as an image may enable the file to print. Turn on Print As Image
from the Acrobat printing options.
The print quality of
photos is not good.
Images are not clear.
The resolution of the photo is very low.
Reduce the photo size. If you increase the photo size in the software application, the
resolution will be reduced.
Before printing, the
machine emits vapor near
the output tray.
Using damp paper can cause vapor during
printing.
This is not a problem. Just keep printing.
It will take longer to print when you print a PDF file as an image.
6. Troubleshooting
286
Printing problems
Condition
Possible cause
Suggested solutions
The machine does not
print special-sized paper,
such as billing paper.
Paper size and paper size setting do not match.
Set the correct paper size in the Custom in Paper tab in Printing Preferences (see
"Opening printing preferences" on page 57).
The printed billing paper
is curled.
The paper type setting does not match.
Change the printer option and try again. Go to Printing Preferences, click Paper tab,
and set type to Thick (see "Opening printing preferences" on page 57).
6. Troubleshooting
287
Printing quality problems
If the inside of the machine is dirty or paper has been loaded improperly, there might be a reduction in print quality. See the table below to clear the problem.
Condition
Light or faded print
Suggested solutions
• If a vertical white streak or faded area appears on the page, the toner supply is low. Install a new toner cartridge (see "Replacing the
toner cartridge" on page 79).
• The paper may not meet paper specifications; for example, the paper may be too moist or rough.
• If the entire page is light, the print resolution setting is too low or the toner save mode is on. Adjust the print resolution and turn
the toner save mode off. See the help screen of the printer driver.
• A combination of faded or smeared defects may indicate that the toner cartridge needs cleaning. Clean the inside of your machine
(see "Cleaning the machine" on page 86).
• The surface of the LSU part inside the machine may be dirty. Clean the inside of your machine (see "Cleaning the machine" on page
86). If these steps do not correct the problem, contact a service representative.
The top half of the paper is
printed lighter than the rest of
the paper
The toner might not adhere properly to this type of paper.
• Change the printer option and try again. Go to Printing Preferences, click the Paper tab, and set the paper type to Recycled (see
"Opening printing preferences" on page 57).
6. Troubleshooting
288
Printing quality problems
Condition
Toner specks
Suggested solutions
• The paper may not meet specifications; for example, the paper may be too moist or rough.
• The transfer roller may be dirty. Clean the inside of your machine (see "Cleaning the machine" on page 86).
A aB bC c
A aB bC c
A aB bC c
A aB bC c
A aB bC c
Dropouts
• The paper path may need cleaning. Contact a service representative (see "Cleaning the machine" on page 86).
If faded areas, generally rounded, occur randomly on the page:
• A single sheet of paper may be defective. Try reprinting the job.
A aBb C
A aBb C
A aBb C
A aBb C
A aBb C
• The moisture content of the paper is uneven or the paper has moist spots on its surface. Try a different brand of paper.
• The paper lot is bad. The manufacturing processes can cause some areas to reject toner. Try a different kind or brand of paper.
• Change the printer option and try again. Go to Printing Preferences, click the Paper tab, and set type to Thick (see "Opening
printing preferences" on page 57).
If these steps do not correct the problem, contact a service representative.
White Spots
If white spots appear on the page:
• The paper is too rough and a lot of dirt from paper falls to the inner components within the machine, so the transfer roller may be
dirty. Clean the inside of your machine (see "Cleaning the machine" on page 86).
• The paper path may need cleaning. Clean the inside of your machine (see "Cleaning the machine" on page 86).
If these steps do not correct the problem, contact a service representative.
6. Troubleshooting
289
Printing quality problems
Condition
Vertical lines
Suggested solutions
If black vertical streaks appear on the page:
• The surface (drum part) of the cartridge inside the machine has probably been scratched. Remove the cartridge and install a new
one (see "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 79, "Replacing the imaging unit" on page 82).
If white vertical streaks appear on the page:
• The surface of the LSU part inside the machine may be dirty. Clean the inside of your machine (see "Cleaning the machine" on page
86). If these steps do not correct the problem, contact a service representative.
Black or color background
If the amount of background shading becomes unacceptable:
• Change to a lighter weight paper.
• Check the environmental conditions: very dry conditions or a high level of humidity (higher than 80% RH) can increase the amount
of background shading.
• Remove the old toner cartridge and install a new one (see "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 79).
• Thoroughly redistribute the toner (see "Redistributing toner" on page 76).
Toner smear
• Clean the inside of the machine (see "Cleaning the machine" on page 86).
• Check the paper type and quality.
• Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one (see "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 79).
6. Troubleshooting
290
Printing quality problems
Condition
Vertical repetitive defects
Suggested solutions
If marks repeatedly appear on the printed side of the page at even intervals:
• The toner cartridge may be damaged. If you still have the same problem, remove the toner cartridge and, install a new one (see
"Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 79).
• Parts of the machine may have toner on them. If the defects occur on the back of the page, the problem will likely correct itself after
a few more pages.
• The fusing assembly may be damaged. Contact a service representative.
Background scatter
A
Background scatter results from bits of toner randomly distributed on the printed page.
• The paper may be too damp. Try printing with a different batch of paper. Do not open packages of paper until necessary so that
the paper does not absorb too much moisture.
• If background scatter occurs on an envelope, change the printing layout to avoid printing over areas that have overlapping seams
on the reverse side. Printing on seams can cause problems.
Or select Thick from the Printing Preferences window (see "Opening printing preferences" on page 57).
• If background scatter covers the entire surface area of a printed page, adjust the print resolution through your software application
or in Printing Preferences (see "Opening printing preferences" on page 57). Ensure the correct paper type is selected. For example:
If Thicker Paper is selected, but Plain Paper actually used, an overcharging can occur causing this copy quality problem.
• If you are using a new toner cartridge, redistribute the toner first (see "Redistributing toner" on page 76).
Toner particles are around bold
characters or pictures
The toner might not adhere properly to this type of paper.
• Change the printer option and try again. Go to Printing Preferences, click the Paper tab, and set the paper type to Recycled (see
"Opening printing preferences" on page 57).
• Ensure the correct paper type is selected. For example: If Thicker Paper is selected, but Plain Paper actually used, an overcharging
can occur causing this copy quality problem.
6. Troubleshooting
291
Printing quality problems
Condition
Suggested solutions
Misformed characters
• If characters are improperly formed and producing hollow images, the paper stock may be too slick. Try different paper.
Page skew
• Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.
A aBb
A aBb C
A aBb C
A aBb C
A aBb C
Cc
Curl or wave
• Check the paper type and quality.
• Ensure that the guides are not too tight or too loose against the paper stack.
• Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.
• Check the paper type and quality. Both high temperature and humidity can cause paper curl.
• Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also try rotating the paper 180° in the tray.
6. Troubleshooting
292
Printing quality problems
Condition
Wrinkles or creases
Suggested solutions
• Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.
• Check the paper type and quality.
• Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also try rotating the paper 180° in the tray.
Back of printouts are dirty
• Check for leaking toner. Clean the inside of the machine (see "Cleaning the machine" on page 86).
Solid color or black pages
• The toner cartridge may not be installed properly. Remove the cartridge and reinsert it.
A
• The toner cartridge may be defective. Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one (see "Replacing the toner cartridge" on
page 79).
• The machine may require repairing. Contact a service representative.
6. Troubleshooting
293
Printing quality problems
Condition
Loose toner
Suggested solutions
• Clean the inside of the machine (see "Cleaning the machine" on page 86).
• Check the paper type and quality.
• Remove the toner cartridge and then, install a new one (see "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 79).
If the problem persists, the machine may require repair. Contact a service representative.
Character voids
A
Horizontal stripes
Character voids are white areas within parts of characters that should be solid black:
• If you are using transparencies, try another type of transparency. Because of the composition of transparencies, some character
voids are normal.
• You may be printing on the wrong surface of the paper. Remove the paper and turn it around.
• The paper may not meet paper specifications.
If horizontally aligned black streaks or smears appear:
• The toner cartridge may be installed improperly. Remove the cartridge and reinsert it.
• The toner cartridge may be defective. Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one (see "Replacing the toner cartridge" on
page 79).
If the problem persists, the machine may require repairing. Contact a service representative.
6. Troubleshooting
294
Printing quality problems
Condition
Curl
Suggested solutions
If the printed paper is curled or paper does not feed into the machine:
• Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also try rotating the paper 180° in the tray.
• Change the printer’s paper option and try again. Go to Printing Preferences, click the Paper tab, and set type to Thin (see
"Opening printing preferences" on page 57).
• An unknown image
repetitively appears on a few
sheets
Your machine is probably being used at an altitude of 1,000 m (3,281 ft) or above.
The high altitude may affect the print quality, such as loose toner or light imaging. Change the altitude setting for your machine (see
"Altitude adjustment" on page 225).
• Loose toner
• Light print or contamination
occurs
6. Troubleshooting
295
Copying problems
Condition
Suggested solutions
Copies are too light or too dark. Adjust the darkness in copy feature to lighten or darken the backgrounds of copies (see "Changing the settings for each copy" on page
62).
If the defect still appears after
cleaning the machine.
set the Copy Feature > Adjust Bkgd. > Auto. (see "Menu overview" on page 33).
Smears, lines, marks, or spots
appear on copies.
• If the defects are on the original, adjust darkness in copy feature to lighten the background of your copies.
Copy image is skewed.
• Ensure that the original is aligned with the registration guide.
• If there are no defects on the original, clean the scan unit (see "Cleaning the scan unit" on page 91).
• The transfer roller may be dirty. Clean the inside of your machine (see "Cleaning the machine" on page 86).
Blank copies print out.
Ensure that the original is face down on the scanner glass or face up in the document feeder.
If these steps do not correct the problem, contact a service representative.
Image rubs off the copy easily.
• Replace the paper in the tray with paper from a new package.
• In high humidity areas, do not leave paper in the machine for extended periods of time.
Frequent copy paper jams
occur.
• Fan the paper, then turn it over in the tray. Replace the paper in the tray with a fresh supply. Check/adjust the paper guides, if
necessary.
• Ensure that the paper is the proper type and weight (see "Print media specifications" on page 118).
• Check for copy paper or pieces of copy paper remaining in the machine after a paper jam has been cleared.
Toner cartridge produces fewer
copies than expected before
running out of toner.
• Your originals may contain pictures, solids, or heavy lines. For example, your originals may be forms, newsletters, books, or other
documents that use more toner.
• The scanner lid may be left open while copies are being made.
• Turn the machine off and back on.
6. Troubleshooting
296
Scanning problems
Condition
The scanner does not work.
Suggested solutions
• Make sure that you place the original to be scanned face down on the scanner glass, or face up in the document feeder (see
"Loading originals" on page 52).
• There may not be enough available memory to hold the document you want to scan. Try the Prescan function to see if that works.
Try lowering the scan resolution rate.
• Check that the machine printer cable is connected properly.
• Make sure that the machine printer cable is not defective. Switch the printer cable with a known good cable. If necessary, replace
the printer cable.
• Check that the scanner is configured correctly. Check scan setting in the application you want to use to make certain that the
scanner job is being sent to the correct port (for example, USB001).
The unit scans very slowly.
• Check if the machine is printing received data. If so, scan the document after the received data has been printed.
• Graphics are scanned more slowly than text.
• Communication speed slows in scan mode because of the large amount of memory required to analyze and reproduce the scanned
image. Set your computer to the ECP printer mode through BIOS setting. It will help to increase the speed. For details about how
to set BIOS, refer to your computer user’s guide.
6. Troubleshooting
297
Scanning problems
Condition
Suggested solutions
Message appears on your
computer screen:
• There may be a copying or printing job in progress. Try your job again when that job is finished.
• Device can’t be set to the H/W
mode you want.
• The machine printer cable may be improperly connected or the power may be off.
• Port is being used by another
program.
• Ensure that the machine is properly connected and the power is on, then restart your computer.
• Port is disabled.
• The selected port is currently being used. Restart your computer and try again.
• The scanner driver is not installed or the operating environment is not set up properly.
• The USB cable may be improperly connected or the power may be off.
• Scanner is busy receiving or
printing data. When the
current job is completed, try
again.
• Invalid handle.
• Scanning has failed.
6. Troubleshooting
298
Faxing problems
Condition
Suggested solutions
The machine is not working,
there is no display, or the
buttons are not working.
• Unplug the power cord and plug it in again.
No dial tone.
• Check that the phone line is properly connected (see "Rear view" on page 23).
• Ensure that there is power being supplied to the electrical outlet.
• Ensure that the power is turned on.
• Check that the phone socket on the wall is working by plugging in another phone.
The numbers stored in memory
do not dial correctly.
Make sure that the numbers are stored in memory correctly. To check that, print an address book list.
The original does not feed into
the machine.
• Make sure that the paper is not wrinkled and you are inserting it in correctly. Check that the original is the right size, not too thick
or thin.
• Make sure that the document feeder is firmly closed.
• The document feeder rubber pad may need to be replaced. Contact a service representative.
Faxes are not received
automatically.
• The receiving mode should be set to fax (see "Changing the receive modes" on page 257).
• Make sure that there is paper in the tray (see "Print media specifications" on page 118).
• Check to see if the display shows any error message. If it does, clear the problem.
The machine does not send.
• Make sure that the original is loaded in the document feeder or on the scanner glass.
• Check the fax machine you are sending to, to see if it can receive your fax.
The incoming fax has blank
spaces or is of poor-quality.
• The fax machine sending you the fax may be faulty.
• A noisy phone line can cause line errors.
• Check your machine by making a copy.
• A toner cartridge has almost reached its estimated cartridge life. Replace the toner cartridge (see "Replacing the toner cartridge"
on page 79).
6. Troubleshooting
299
Faxing problems
Condition
Suggested solutions
Some of the words on an
incoming fax are stretched.
The fax machine sending the fax had a temporary document jam.
There are lines on the originals
you sent.
Check your scan unit for marks and clean it (see "Cleaning the scan unit" on page 91).
The machine dials a number,
but the connection with the
other fax machine fails.
The other fax machine may be turned off, out of paper, or cannot answer incoming calls. Speak with the other machine operator and
ask them to solve the problem on their side.
Faxes do not store in memory.
There may not be enough memory space to store the fax. If the display indicating the memory status shows, delete any faxes you no
longer need from the memory, and then try to store the fax again. Call for service.
Blank areas appear at the
bottom of each page or on
other pages, with a small strip
of text at the top.
You may have chosen the wrong paper settings in the user option setting. Check the paper size and type again.
6. Troubleshooting
300
Operating system problems
1
Common Windows problems
Condition
Suggested solutions
“File in Use” message appears
during installation.
Exit all software applications. Remove all software from the startup group, then restart Windows. Reinstall the printer driver.
“General Protection Fault”,
“Exception OE”, “Spool 32”, or
“Illegal Operation” messages
appear.
Close all other applications, reboot Windows and try printing again.
“Fail To Print”, “A printer
timeout error occurred”
message appear.
These messages may appear during printing. Just keep waiting until the machine finishes printing. If the message appears in ready
mode or after printing has completed, check the connection and/or whether an error has occurred.
Samsung Printer Experience is
not shown when you click more
settings.
Samsung Printer Experience is not installed. Download the app. from the Windows Store and install it.
Machine information is not
displayed when you click the
device in the Devices and
Printers.
Check the Printer properties. Click the Ports tab.
(Control Panel > Devices and Printers > Right-click on your printer icon and select Printer properties)
If the port is set to File or LPT, uncheck them and select TCP/IP, USB, or WSD.
Refer to the Microsoft Windows User’s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Windows error messages.
6. Troubleshooting
301
Operating system problems
2
Common Mac problems
Condition
The machine does not print PDF files
correctly. Some parts of graphics, text, or
illustrations are missing.
Suggested solutions
Printing the PDF file as an image may enable the file to print. Turn on Print As Image from the Acrobat printing options.
It will take longer to print when you print a PDF file as an image.
Some letters are not displayed normally
during cover page printing.
Mac OS cannot create the font while printing the cover page. The English alphabet and numbers are displayed normally on
the cover page.
When printing a document in Mac with
Acrobat Reader 6.0 or higher, colors
print incorrectly.
Make sure that the resolution setting in your machine driver matches the one in Acrobat Reader.
Refer to the Mac User’s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Mac error messages.
6. Troubleshooting
302
Operating system problems
3
Common Linux problems
Condition
Suggested solutions
There is no xsane nor simple-scan application on my
Linux machine.
For some Linux distributions, there might be no default scan application. To use scan features, install one of scan
applications using download center supplied by the OS(ex. Ubuntu Software Center for Ubuntu, Install/Remove
Software for openSUSE, Software for Fedora).
Scanner can not be found via network.
For some Linux distributions, strong firewall is enabled and it may block our installer from opening the necessary
port for searching network devices. In such a case, open the snmp port - 22161 manually or disable the firewall
temporarily while using the device.
When printing more than one copy, the second copy
does not print.
The problem occurs on Ubuntu 12.04 due to the problem in standard CUPS filter 'pdftops'. Update 'cups-filters'
package to version 1.0.18 to fix the problem ('pdftops' is a part of 'cups-filters' package).
Unchecking the collate option in the Print Dialog
does not work.
For some distributions, GNOME Print Dialog has an issue handling the collate option. As workaround, set the
default value of collate option to False using the system's printing utility(execute "system-config-printer" in the
Terminal program).
Printing always works with duplex.
This duplex issue was in Ubuntu 9.10 CUPS package. Update CUPS version to 1.4.1-5ubuntu2.2.
Printer is not added through system's printing
utility.
The problem occurs on Debian 7 due to the defect in 'system-config-printer' package of the Debian 7 (http://
bugs.debian.org/cgi-bin/bugreport.cgi?bug=662813 in Debian bug tracking system). Please use another way to
add printer (CUPS WebUI for example)
Paper size and orientation are disabled in the Print
Dialog when opening text files.
The problem occurs on Fedora 19 and it's related to 'leafpad' text editor on Fedora 19. Please use other text
editors like 'gedit'.
Refer to the Linux User’s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Linux error messages.
6. Troubleshooting
303
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
If you have any comments or questions regarding Samsung products, contact
the Samsung customer care center.
Country/Region
BELARUS
Country/Region
ALGERIA
ANGOLA
ARGENTINE
ARMENIA
AUSTRALIA
AUSTRIA
Customer Care Center
3004 (Toll Free)
WebSite
www.samsung.com/
n_africa/support
www.samsung.com/
support
0800-555-SAM(7267)
www.samsung.com/ar
BOLIVIA
0-800-05-555
www.samsung.com/
support
BOSNIA
1300 362 603
www.samsung.com/
au/support
BOTSWANA
0800-SAMSUNG (0800-7267864)
www.samsung.com/
at/support
BRAZIL
[Only for Dealers] 0810-112233
AZERBAIJAN
0-88-555-55-55
www.samsung.com/
support
BULGARIA
8000-GSAM (8000-4726)
www.samsung.com/
ae/support (English)
BURUNDI
www.samsung.com/
ae_ar/support (Arabic)
CAMEROON
BAHRAIN
BANGLADESH
0961-2300300
0800-0300300 (Toll free)
www.samsung.com/
in/support
CANADA
WebSite
810-800-500-55-500
www.samsung.com/
support
02-201-24-18
www.samsung.com/
be/support (Dutch)
BELGIUM
917 267 864
[Only for Premium HA] 0800366661
Customer Care Center
www.samsung.com/
be_fr/support (French)
800-10-7260
www.samsung.com/
cl/support
055 233 999
www.samsung.com/
support
8007260000
www.samsung.com/
support
0800-124-421 (Demais cidades e
regiões)
www.samsung.com/
br/support
4004-0000 (Capitais e grandes
centros)
0800 111 31 , Безплатна
телефонна линия
www.samsung.com/
bg/support
200
www.samsung.com/
support
7095- 0077
www.samsung.com/
africa_fr/support
1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
www.samsung.com/
ca/support(English)
www.samsung.com/
ca_fr/support (French)
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
250
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
Country/Region
CHILE
CHINA
Customer Care Center
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
[HHP] 02-24828200
400-810-5858
Bogotá en el 600 12 72
COLOMBIA
Sin costo en todo el pais 01 8000
112 112
WebSite
Country/Region
1-800-751-2676
www.samsung.com/
cl/support
www.samsung.com/
cn/support
COSTA RICA
CROATIA
Cote D’ Ivoire
CYPRUS
CZECH
DENMARK
www.samsung.com/
latin_en/support
(English)
www.samsung.com/
co
DRC
www.samsung.com/
latin/support
(Spanish)
499999
www.samsung.com/
support
1-800-SAMSUNG (72-6786)
www.samsung.com/
latin/support
(Spanish)
ECUADOR
www.samsung.com/
latin_en/support
(English)
072 726 786
www.samsung.com/
hr/support
EGYPT
8000 0077
www.samsung.com/
africa_fr/support
EIRE
8009 4000 only from landline, toll
free
www.samsung.com/
gr/support
800-SAMSUNG (800-726786)
www.samsung.com/
cz/support
70 70 19 70
www.samsung.com/
dk/support
www.samsung.com/
latin_en/
support(English)
08000-7267864
www.samsung.com/
eg/support
16580
0818 717100
www.samsung.com/
ie/support
8000-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
www.samsung.com/
latin/support
(Spanish)
EL SALVADOR
ESTONIA
WebSite
www.samsung.com/
latin/support
(Spanish)
DOMINICAN
REPUBLIC
Y desde tu celular #726
00-800-1-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
Customer Care Center
www.samsung.com/
latin_en/support
(English)
800-7267
www.samsung.com/
ee/support
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
251
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
Country/Region
FINLAND
FRANCE
Customer Care Center
030-6227 515
www.samsung.com/fi/
support
01 48 63 00 00
www.samsung.com/
fr/support
0180 6 SAMSUNG bzw.
0180 6 7267864*
GERMANY
WebSite
Country/Region
Customer Care Center
1-800-299-0033
www.samsung.com/
latin/support
(Spanish)
GUATEMALA
www.samsung.com/
latin_en/support
(English)
www.samsung.com/
de/support
800-2791-9111
(*0,20 €/Anruf aus dem dt.
Festnetz, aus dem Mobilfunk
max. 0,60 €/Anruf)
www.samsung.com/
latin/support
(Spanish)
HONDURAS
www.samsung.com/
latin_en/support
(English)
[HHP] 0180 6 M SAMSUNG bzw.
0180 6 67267864*
(*0,20 €/Anruf aus dem dt.
Festnetz, aus dem Mobilfunk
max. 0,60 €/Anruf)
GEORGIA
GHANA
GREECE
3698 4698
www.samsung.com/
support
0800-10077
0302-200077
www.samsung.com/
africa_en/support
HUNGARY
80111-SAMSUNG (80111 726
7864) only from land line
www.samsung.com/
gr/support
INDIA
(+30) 210 6897691 from mobile
and land line
www.samsung.com/
hk/support (Chinese)
HONG KONG
0-800-555-555
INDONESIA
IRAN
WebSite
www.samsung.com/
hk_en/support
(English)
0680SAMSUNG (0680-726-786)
0680PREMIUM (0680-773-648)
1800 3000 8282 - Toll Free
1800 266 8282 - Toll Free
021-56997777
08001128888
021-8255 [CE]
021-42132 [HHP]
www.samsung.com/
hu/support
www.samsung.com/
in/support
www.samsung.com/
id/support
www.samsung.com/
iran/support
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
252
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
Country/Region
ITALIA
Customer Care Center
800-SAMSUNG (800.7267864)
www.samsung.com/
it/support
1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
www.samsung.com/
latin_en/support
(English)
JAMAICA
JAPAN
JORDAN
KAZAKHSTAN
KENYA
0120-363-905
www.samsung.com/
jp/support
0800-22273
www.samsung.com/
Levant
06 5777444
8-10-800-500-55-500 (GSM:
7799, VIP care 7700)
0800 545 545
183-CALL (183-2255)
KUWAIT
KYRGYZSTAN
LATVIA
LEBANON
LITHUANIA
WebSite
www.samsung.com/
kz_ru/support
www.samsung.com/
support
www.samsung.com/
ae/support (English)
www.samsung.com/
ae_ar/support (Arabic)
00-800-500-55-500 (GSM: 9977)
8000-7267
961 1484 999
8-800-77777
www.samsung.com/
support
www.samsung.com/
lv/support
www.samsung.com/
Levant
www.samsung.com/
lt/support
Country/Region
LUXEMBURG
MACAU
MACEDONIA
Customer Care Center
261 03 710
www.samsung.com/
be_fr/support
0800 333
www.samsung.com/
support
023 207 777
1800-88-9999
MALAYSIA
MAURITIUS
MEXICO
MOLDOVA
MONGOLIA
MONTENEGRO
MOROCCO
MOZAMBIQUE
MYANMAR
NAMIBIA
WebSite
603-77137477 (Overseas
contact)
www.samsung.com/
my/support
800 2550
www.samsung.com/
support
01-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
www.samsung.com/
mx/support
0-800-614-40
www.samsung.com/
support
+7-495-363-17-00
www.samsung.com/
support
020 405 888
www.samsung.com/
support
080 100 22 55
www.samsung.com/
n_africa/support
847267864 / 827267864
www.samsung.com/
support
+95-01-2399-888
www.samsung.com/
support
08 197 267 864
www.samsung.com/
support
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
253
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
Country/Region
NIGERIA
NETHERLANDS
NEW ZEALAND
Customer Care Center
WebSite
0900-SAMSUNG (0900-7267864)
(€ 0,10/Min)
www.samsung.com/
nl/support
0800 726 786
www.samsung.com/
nz/support
001-800-5077267
www.samsung.com/
latin/support(Spanish)
02- 422-2111 [ Standard Landline
]
www.samsung.com/
latin_en/support
(English)
801-172-678* lub +48 22 607-93- www.samsung.com/
33*
pl/support
815 56480
www.samsung.com/
no/support
800-SAMSUNG (800 - 726 7864)
www.samsung.com/
ae/support (English)
www.samsung.com/
ae_ar/support (Arabic)
0800-Samsung (72678)
800-0101
PANAMA
PARAGUAY
Customer Care Center
www.samsung.com/
africa_en/support
OMAN
PAKISTAN
Country/Region
0800-726-7864
NICARAGUA
NORWAY
WebSite
www.samsung.com/
pk/support
www.samsung.com/
latin/support
(Spanish)
www.samsung.com/
latin_en/support
(English)
0800-11-SAMS(7267)
PERU
PHILIPPINES
POLAND
0800-777-08
www.samsung.com/
pe/support
1-800-10-726-7864 [ PLDT Toll
Free ]
www.samsung.com/
ph/support
1-800-8-726-7864 [ Globe
Landline and Mobile ]
Dedykowana infolinia do obsługi
zapytań dotyczących telefonów
komórkowych: 801-672-678* lub
+48 22 607-93-33*
* (koszt połączenia według taryfy
operatora)
PORTUGAL
PUERTO RICO
808 20 7267
www.samsung.com/
pt/support
1-800-682-3180
www.samsung.com/
latin/support
(Spanish)
www.samsung.com/
latin_en/support
(English)
www.samsung.com/ar
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
254
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
Country/Region
Customer Care Center
800-CALL (800-2255)
QATAR
REUNION
RWANDA
0262 50 88 80
9999
*8000 (apel in retea)
ROMANIA
RUSSIA
08008-726-78-64 (08008SAMSUNG) Apel GRATUIT
SERBIA
SINGAPORE
SLOVENIA
Country/Region
www.samsung.com/
ae/support (English)
SLOVAKIA
www.samsung.com/
ae_ar/support (Arabic)
SOUTH AFRICA
www.samsung.com/
support
SPAIN
www.samsung.com/
support
SRI LANKA
www.samsung.com/
ro/support
8-800-555-55-55 (VIP care 8-800555-55-88)
www.samsung.com/
ru/support
800 247 3457 (800 24/7 HELP)
www.samsung.com/
sa/home
SAUDI ARABIA
SENEGAL
WebSite
SUDAN
SWEDEN
SWITZERLAND
Customer Care Center
0800 - SAMSUNG
www.samsung.com/
africa_fr/support
SYRIA
011 321 6899
www.samsung.com/
rs/support
TAJIKISTAN
1800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
www.samsung.com/
sg/support
TAIWAN
080 697 267 (brezplačna številka) www.samsung.com/si
TANZANIA
www.samsung.com/
sk/support
(0800-726 786)
0860 SAMSUNG (726 7864)
www.samsung.com/
support
0034902172678
www.samsung.com/
es/support
[HHP] 0034902167267
0117540540
www.samsung.com/
support
0115900000
1969
www.samsung.com/
support
0771 726 7864 (0771-SAMSUNG)
www.samsung.com/
se/support
0800 726 78 64 (0800-SAMSUNG) www.samsung.com/
ch/support (German)
www.samsung.com/
ch_fr/support (French)
www.samsung.com/
sa_en
800-00-0077
WebSite
18252273
www.samsung.com/
Levant
8-10-800-500-55-500
www.samsung.com/
support
0800-329999
www.samsung.com/
tw/support
0800 755 755
www.samsung.com/
support
0685 889 900
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
255
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
Country/Region
THAILAND
Customer Care Center
0-2689-3232,
1800-29-3232
1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
TRINIDAD &
TOBAGO
TURKEY
TUNISIA
U.S.A
Country/Region
www.samsung.com/
latin/support
(Spanish)
Customer Care Center
0-800-502-000
www.samsung.com/
th/support
www.samsung.com/
latin_en/support
(English)
URUGUAY
UZBEKISTAN
www.samsung.com/
tr/support
VENEZUELA
80-1000-12 www.samsung.com/
n_africa/support
VIETNAM
800-SAMSUNG (800 -726 7864)
www.samsung.com/
ae/support (English)
ZAMBIA
WebSite
www.samsung.com/
ua/support (Ukrainian)
UKRAINE
444 77 11
U.A.E
UK
WebSite
www.samsung.com/
ua_ru/support
(Russian)
0800-SAMS(7267)
www.samsung.com/ar
00-800-500-55-500 (GSM: 7799)
www.samsung.com/
support
0-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
www.samsung.com/
ve/support
1800 588 889
www.samsung.com/
vn/support
0211 350370
www.samsung.com/
support
www.samsung.com/
ae_ar/support (Arabic)
0330 SAMSUNG (7267864)
www.samsung.com/
uk/support
1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
www.samsung.com/
us/support
1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
www.samsung.com/
us/support
0800 300 300
www.samsung.com/
support
-Consumer
Electonics
U.S.A
-(Mobile Phones)
UGANDA
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
256
Glossary
ADF
The following glossary helps you get familiar with the product by
understanding the terminologies commonly used with printing as well as
mentioned in this user’s guide.
802.11
802.11 is a set of standards for wireless local area network (WLAN)
communication, developed by the IEEE LAN/MAN Standards Committee (IEEE
802).
802.11b/g/n
802.11b/g/n can share same hardware and use the 2.4 GHz band. 802.11b
supports bandwidth up to 11 Mbps, 802.11n supports bandwidth up to 150
Mbps. 802.11b/g/n devices may occasionally suffer interference from
microwave ovens, cordless telephones, and Bluetooth devices.
An Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) is a scanning unit that will automatically
feed an original sheet of paper so that the machine can scan some amount of the
paper at once.
AppleTalk
AppleTalk is a proprietary suite of protocols developed by Apple, Inc for
computer networking. It was included in the original Mac (1984) and is now
deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP/IP networking.
BIT Depth
A computer graphics term describing the number of bits used to represent the
color of a single pixel in a bitmapped image. Higher color depth gives a broader
range of distinct colors. As the number of bits increases, the number of possible
colors becomes impractically large for a color map. 1-bit color is commonly
called as monochrome or black and white.
Access point
Access Point or Wireless Access Point (AP or WAP) is a device that connects
wireless communication devices together on wireless local area networks
(WLAN), and acts as a central transmitter and receiver of WLAN radio signals.
BMP
A bitmapped graphics format used internally by the Microsoft Windows
graphics subsystem (GDI), and used commonly as a simple graphics file format
on that platform.
Glossary
312
Glossary
BOOTP
Coverage
Bootstrap Protocol. A network protocol used by a network client to obtain its IP
address automatically. This is usually done in the bootstrap process of
computers or operating systems running on them. The BOOTP servers assign
the IP address from a pool of addresses to each client. BOOTP enables 'diskless
workstation' computers to obtain an IP address prior to loading any advanced
operating system.
It is the printing term used for a toner usage measurement on printing. For
example, 5% coverage means that an A4 sided paper has about 5% image or text
on it. So, if the paper or original has complicated images or lots of text on it, the
coverage will be higher and at the same time, a toner usage will be as much as
the coverage.
CSV
CCD
Charge Coupled Device (CCD) is a hardware which enables the scan job. CCD
Locking mechanism is also used to hold the CCD module to prevent any damage
when you move the machine.
Comma Separated Values (CSV). A type of file format, CSV is used to exchange
data between disparate applications. The file format, as it is used in Microsoft
Excel, has become a de facto standard throughout the industry, even among
non-Microsoft platforms.
Collation
DADF
Collation is a process of printing a multiple-copy job in sets. When collation is
selected, the device prints an entire set before printing additional copies.
A Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) is a scanning unit that will
automatically feed and turn over an original sheet of paper so that the machine
can scan on both sides of the paper.
Control Panel
Default
A control panel is a flat, typically vertical, area where control or monitoring
instruments are displayed. They are typically found in front of the machine.
The value or setting that is in effect when taking a printer out of its box state,
reset, or initialized.
Glossary
313
Glossary
DHCP
DPI
A Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a client-server networking
protocol. A DHCP server provides configuration parameters specific to the DHCP
client host requesting, generally, information required by the client host to
participate on an IP network. DHCP also provides a mechanism for allocation of
IP addresses to client hosts.
Dots Per Inch (DPI) is a measurement of resolution that is used for scanning and
printing. Generally, higher DPI results in a higher resolution, more visible detail
in the image, and a larger file size.
DIMM
Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection. Distinctive Ring is a telephone company
service which enables a user to use a single telephone line to answer several
different telephone numbers.
Dual Inline Memory Module (DIMM), a small circuit board that holds memory.
DIMM stores all the data within the machine like printing data, received fax data.
DRPD
Duplex
DLNA
The Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) is a standard that allows devices on
a home network to share information with each other across the network.
A mechanism that will automatically turn over a sheet of paper so that the
machine can print (or scan) on both sides of the paper. A printer equipped with
a Duplex Unit can print on both sides of paper during one print cycle.
DNS
Duty Cycle
The Domain Name Server (DNS) is a system that stores information associated
with domain names in a distributed database on networks, such as the Internet.
Duty cycle is the page quantity which does not affect printer performance for a
month. Generally the printer has the lifespan limitation such as pages per year.
The lifespan means the average capacity of print-outs, usually within the
warranty period. For example, if the duty cycle is 48,000 pages per month
assuming 20 working days, a printer limits 2,400 pages a day.
Dot Matrix Printer
A dot matrix printer refers to a type of computer printer with a print head that
runs back and forth on the page and prints by impact, striking an ink-soaked
cloth ribbon against the paper, much like a typewriter.
Glossary
314
Glossary
ECM
EtherTalk
Error Correction Mode (ECM) is an optional transmission mode built into Class 1
fax machines or fax modems. It automatically detects and corrects errors in the
fax transmission process that are sometimes caused by telephone line noise.
A suite of protocols developed by Apple Computer for computer networking. It
was included in the original Mac (1984) and is now deprecated by Apple in favor
of TCP/IP networking.
Emulation
FDI
Emulation is a technique of one machine obtaining the same results as another.
Foreign Device Interface (FDI) is a card installed inside the machine to allow a
third party device such as a coin operated device or a card reader. Those devices
allow the pay-for-print service on your machine.
An emulator duplicates the functions of one system with a different system, so
that the second system behaves like the first system. Emulation focuses on exact
reproduction of external behavior, which is in contrast to simulation, which
concerns an abstract model of the system being simulated, often considering its
internal state.
Ethernet
Ethernet is a frame-based computer networking technology for local area
networks (LANs). It defines wiring and signaling for the physical layer, and frame
formats and protocols for the media access control (MAC)/data link layer of the
OSI model. Ethernet is mostly standardized as IEEE 802.3. It has become the most
widespread LAN technology in use during the 1990s to the present.
FTP
A File Transfer Protocol (FTP) is a commonly used protocol for exchanging files
over any network that supports the TCP/IP protocol (such as the Internet or an
intranet).
Fuser Unit
The part of a laser printer that fuses the toner onto the print media. It consists of
a heat roller and a pressure roller. After toner is transferred onto the paper, the
fuser unit applies heat and pressure to ensure that the toner stays on the paper
permanently, which is why paper is warm when it comes out of a laser printer.
Glossary
315
Glossary
Gateway
IEEE
A connection between computer networks, or between a computer network
and a telephone line. It is very popular, as it is a computer or a network that
allows access to another computer or network.
The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) is an international
non-profit, professional organization for the advancement of technology
related to electricity.
Grayscale
IEEE 1284
A shades of gray that represents light and dark portions of an image when color
images are converted to grayscale; colors are represented by various shades of
gray.
The 1284 parallel port standard was developed by the Institute of Electrical and
Electronics Engineers (IEEE). The term "1284-B" refers to a specific connector
type on the end of the parallel cable that attaches to the peripheral (for example,
a printer).
Halftone
Intranet
An image type that simulates grayscale by varying the number of dots. Highly
colored areas consist of a large number of dots, while lighter areas consist of a
smaller number of dots.
Mass storage device (HDD)
Mass storage device (HDD), commonly referred to as a hard drive or hard disk, is
a non-volatile storage device which stores digitally-encoded data on rapidly
rotating platters with magnetic surfaces.
A private network that uses Internet Protocols, network connectivity, and
possibly the public telecommunication system to securely share part of an
organization's information or operations with its employees. Sometimes the
term refers only to the most visible service, the internal website.
IP address
An Internet Protocol (IP) address is a unique number that devices use in order to
identify and communicate with each other on a network utilizing the Internet
Protocol standard.
Glossary
316
Glossary
IPM
ITU-T
The Images Per Minute (IPM) is a way of measuring the speed of a printer. An IPM
rate indicates the number of single-sided sheets a printer can complete within
one minute.
The International Telecommunication Union is an international organization
established to standardize and regulate international radio and
telecommunications. Its main tasks include standardization, allocation of the
radio spectrum, and organizing interconnection arrangements between
different countries to allow international phone calls. A -T out of ITU-T indicates
telecommunication.
IPP
The Internet Printing Protocol (IPP) defines a standard protocol for printing as
well as managing print jobs, media size, resolution, and so forth. IPP can be used
locally or over the Internet to hundreds of printers, and also supports access
control, authentication, and encryption, making it a much more capable and
secure printing solution than older ones.
ITU-T No. 1 chart
Standardized test chart published by ITU-T for document facsimile
transmissions.
IPX/SPX
JBIG
IPX/SPX stands for Internet Packet Exchange/Sequenced Packet Exchange. It is a
networking protocol used by the Novell NetWare operating systems. IPX and
SPX both provide connection services similar to TCP/IP, with the IPX protocol
having similarities to IP, and SPX having similarities to TCP. IPX/SPX was
primarily designed for local area networks (LANs), and is a very efficient protocol
for this purpose (typically its performance exceeds that of TCP/IP on a LAN).
Joint Bi-level Image Experts Group (JBIG) is an image compression standard with
no loss of accuracy or quality, which was designed for compression of binary
images, particularly for faxes, but can also be used on other images.
ISO
JPEG
Joint Photographic Experts Group (JPEG) is a most commonly used standard
method of lossy compression for photographic images. It is the format used for
storing and transmitting photographs on the World Wide Web.
The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) is an international
standard-setting body composed of representatives from national standards
bodies. It produces world-wide industrial and commercial standards.
Glossary
317
Glossary
LDAP
MH
The Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) is a networking protocol for
querying and modifying directory services running over TCP/IP.
Modified Huffman (MH) is a compression method for decreasing the amount of
data that needs to be transmitted between the fax machines to transfer the
image recommended by ITU-T T.4. MH is a codebook-based run-length
encoding scheme optimized to efficiently compress white space. As most faxes
consist mostly of white space, this minimizes the transmission time of most
faxes.
LED
A Light-Emitting Diode (LED) is a semiconductor device that indicates the status
of a machine.
MMR
MAC address
Media Access Control (MAC) address is a unique identifier associated with a
network adapter. MAC address is a unique 48-bit identifier usually written as 12
hexadecimal characters grouped in pairs (e. g., 00-00-0c-34-11-4e). This address
is usually hard-coded into a Network Interface Card (NIC) by its manufacturer,
and used as an aid for routers trying to locate machines on large networks.
Modified Modified READ (MMR) is a compression method recommended by ITUT T.6.
Modem
A device that modulates a carrier signal to encode digital information, and also
demodulates such a carrier signal to decode transmitted information.
MFP
MR
Multi Function Peripheral (MFP) is an office machine that includes the following
functionality in one physical body, so as to have a printer, a copier, a fax, a
scanner and etc.
Modified Read (MR) is a compression method recommended by ITU-T T.4. MR
encodes the first scanned line using MH. The next line is compared to the first,
the differences determined, and then the differences are encoded and
transmitted.
Glossary
318
Glossary
NetWare
OSI
A network operating system developed by Novell, Inc. It initially used
cooperative multitasking to run various services on a PC, and the network
protocols were based on the archetypal Xerox XNS stack. Today NetWare
supports TCP/IP as well as IPX/SPX.
Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) is a model developed by the International
Organization for Standardization (ISO) for communications. OSI offers a
standard, modular approach to network design that divides the required set of
complex functions into manageable, self-contained, functional layers. The layers
are, from top to bottom, Application, Presentation, Session, Transport, Network,
Data Link and Physical.
OPC
Organic Photo Conductor (OPC) is a mechanism that makes a virtual image for
print using a laser beam emitted from a laser printer, and it is usually green or
rust colored and has a cylinder shape.
An imaging unit containing a drum slowly wears the drum surface by its usage
in the printer, and it should be replaced appropriately since it gets worn from
contact with the cartridge development brush, cleaning mechanism, and paper.
Originals
The first example of something, such as a document, photograph or text, etc,
which is copied, reproduced or translated to produce others, but which is not
itself copied or derived from something else.
PABX
A private automatic branch exchange (PABX) is an automatic telephone
switching system within a private enterprise.
PCL
Printer Command Language (PCL) is a Page Description Language (PDL)
developed by HP as a printer protocol and has become an industry standard.
Originally developed for early inkjet printers, PCL has been released in varying
levels for thermal, dot matrix printer, and laser printers.
PDF
Portable Document Format (PDF) is a proprietary file format developed by
Adobe Systems for representing two dimensional documents in a device
independent and resolution independent format.
Glossary
319
Glossary
PostScript
Protocol
PostScript (PS) is a page description language and programming language used
primarily in the electronic and desktop publishing areas. - that is run in an
interpreter to generate an image.
A convention or standard that controls or enables the connection,
communication, and data transfer between two computing endpoints.
PS
Printer Driver
See PostScript.
A program used to send commands and transfer data from the computer to the
printer.
Print Media
The media like paper, envelopes, labels, and transparencies which can be used
in a printer, a scanner, a fax or, a copier.
PSTN
The Public-Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) is the network of the world's
public circuit-switched telephone networks which, on industrial premises, is
usually routed through the switchboard.
RADIUS
PPM
Pages Per Minute (PPM) is a method of measurement for determining how fast
a printer works, meaning the number of pages a printer can produce in one
minute.
Remote Authentication Dial In User Service (RADIUS) is a protocol for remote
user authentication and accounting. RADIUS enables centralized management
of authentication data such as usernames and passwords using an AAA
(authentication, authorization, and accounting) concept to manage network
access.
PRN file
Resolution
An interface for a device driver, this allows software to interact with the device
driver using standard input/output system calls, which simplifies many tasks.
The sharpness of an image, measured in Dots Per Inch (DPI). The higher the dpi,
the greater the resolution.
Glossary
320
Glossary
SMB
TCP/IP
Server Message Block (SMB) is a network protocol mainly applied to share files,
printers, serial ports, and miscellaneous communications between nodes on a
network. It also provides an authenticated Inter-process communication
mechanism.
The Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) and the Internet Protocol (IP); the set of
communications protocols that implement the protocol stack on which the
Internet and most commercial networks run.
TCR
SMTP
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is the standard for e-mail transmissions
across the Internet. SMTP is a relatively simple, text-based protocol, where one
or more recipients of a message are specified, and then the message text is
transferred. It is a client-server protocol, where the client transmits an email
message to the server.
SSID
Service Set Identifier (SSID) is a name of a wireless local area network (WLAN). All
wireless devices in a WLAN use the same SSID in order to communicate with
each other. The SSIDs are case-sensitive and have a maximum length of 32
characters.
Transmission Confirmation Report (TCR) provides details of each transmission
such as job status, transmission result and number of pages sent. This report can
be set to print after each job or only after failed transmissions.
TIFF
Tagged Image File Format (TIFF) is a variable-resolution bitmapped image
format. TIFF describes image data that typically come from scanners. TIFF
images make use of tags, keywords defining the characteristics of the image that
is included in the file. This flexible and platform-independent format can be
used for pictures that have been made by various image processing
applications.
Toner Cartridge
Subnet Mask
The subnet mask is used in conjunction with the network address to determine
which part of the address is the network address and which part is the host
address.
A kind of bottle or container used in a machine like a printer which contains
toner. Toner is a powder used in laser printers and photocopiers, which forms
the text and images on the printed paper. Toner can be fused by by a
combination of heat/pressure from the fuser, causing it to bind to the fibers in
the paper.
Glossary
321
Glossary
TWAIN
Watermark
An industry standard for scanners and software. By using a TWAIN-compliant
scanner with a TWAIN-compliant program, a scan can be initiated from within
the program. It is an image capture API for Microsoft Windows and Apple Mac
operating systems.
A watermark is a recognizable image or pattern in paper that appears lighter
when viewed by transmitted light. Watermarks were first introduced in Bologna,
Italy in 1282; they have been used by papermakers to identify their product, and
also on postage stamps, currency, and other government documents to
discourage counterfeiting.
UNC Path
WEP
Uniform Naming Convention (UNC) is a standard way to access network shares
in Window NT and other Microsoft products. The format of a UNC path is:
\\<servername>\<sharename>\<Additional directory>
URL
Uniform Resource Locator (URL) is the global address of documents and
resources on the Internet. The first part of the address indicates what protocol to
use, the second part specifies the IP address or the domain name where the
resource is located.
Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) is a security protocol specified in IEEE 802.11 to
provide the same level of security as that of a wired LAN. WEP provides security
by encrypting data over radio so that it is protected as it is transmitted from one
end point to another.
WIA
Windows Imaging Architecture (WIA) is an imaging architecture that is originally
introduced in Windows Me and Windows XP. A scan can be initiated from within
these operating systems by using a WIA-compliant scanner.
USB
WPA
Universal Serial Bus (USB) is a standard that was developed by the USB
Implementers Forum, Inc., to connect computers and peripherals. Unlike the
parallel port, USB is designed to concurrently connect a single computer USB
port to multiple peripherals.
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a class of systems to secure wireless (Wi-Fi)
computer networks, which was created to improve upon the security features of
WEP.
Glossary
322
Glossary
WPA-PSK
WPA-PSK (WPA Pre-Shared Key) is special mode of WPA for small business or
home users. A shared key, or password, is configured in the wireless access point
(WAP) and any wireless laptop or desktop devices. WPA-PSK generates a unique
key for each session between a wireless client and the associated WAP for more
advanced security.
WPS
The Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) is a standard for establishing a wireless home
network. If your wireless access point supports WPS, you can configure the
wireless network connection easily without a computer.
XPS
XML Paper Specification (XPS) is a specification for a Page Description Language
(PDL) and a new document format, which has benefits for portable document
and electronic document, developed by Microsoft. It is an XML-based
specification, based on a new print path and a vector-based deviceindependent document format.
Glossary
323
Index
A
general setup
copying
address book
editing
228
group editing
229
registering
228
using
228
address book setup
228
AirPrint
203
AnyWeb Print
264
basic copying
60
reducing or enlarging copies
62
default settings
tray setting
direct printing utility
sending a fax in the computer
159
multi sending
easy document creator
269
e-book conversion
269
eco printing
252
outside
86
error message
110
pickup roller
89
scan unit
91
F
86
favorites settings, for printing
control panel
24
fax
convention
14
adding documents to a reserved fax
252
56
254,
67
faxing
adjusting darkness
57
87
copy
fax feature
253, 255
fax sending
226
cleaning a machine
214
receiving faxes in memory 260, 257, 258,
257,
259, 257, 258, 252
238
entering character
inside
253
Printing sent fax report automatically 260
49
driver installation
C
cleaning
delaying a fax transmission
printing faxes on both sides of the paper
259
E
27
254, 257
forwarding a received fax to another
destination
256, 255
D
Unix
buttons
canceling a reserved fax job
general setup
B
print screen
211
69, 68
preparing to fax
66
receiving in Fax mode
68
features
5
machine features
208
print media feature
118
front view
22
G
general icons
14
Index 324
Index
general settings
217
linux scanning
glossary
312
loading
google cloud printing
205
251
paper in manual feeder/multi-purpose tray
42,
41
I
special media
id copy
ID copy button
63
24, 25
J
multi-purpose tray
loading originals
clearing original document
tips for avoiding paper jams
96, 99
95
L
network
driver installation for network connected
157,
144, 145
239
using SetIP
LCD display
browsing the machine status 211, 213, 214,
221
common Linux problems
303
driver installation for network connected
158,
146, 147
printer properties
242, 241
scanning
251, 124
using SetIP
152
151
250
211, 213, 214, 221
maintenance parts
73
42
33
125, 149
162
150, 151, 152, 188
150, 165
n-up printing
Mac
240
O
optional tray
loading paper
manual feeder/multi-purpose tray
menu overview
222
SetIP program
211, 213, 214, 221
machine setup
loading
general setup
wired network setup
scanning
machine status
158
157
159
153
IPv6 configuration
mac
machine information
Linux
driver installation
Linux
Mac
UNIX
Windows
installing environment
250, 122
scanning
44
51
302
printing
using special media
N
M
common Mac problems
42
44
Mac
jam
tips on using
41
overlay printing
create
237
Index 325
Index
delete
237
print
237
P
placing a machine
adjusting the altitude
preparing originals type
225
50
print
general setup
210
mobile OS
196
printing
changing the default print settings
231
Linux
241
Mac
239
multiple pages on one sheet of paper
Mac
240
printing a document
Windows
Mac
54
240
rear view
regulatiory information
resolution
faxing
242
S
envelope
45
using direct printing utility
238
safety
labels
47
transparency
print menu
Printing
information
15
symbols
15
Linux
241
49
Mac
239
samsung printer experience
275
UNIX
242
Samsung Printer Status
273
231
scan feature
245
49, 44
46
210
printing feature
problem
operating system problems
242
printer status
general information
printing a document
118
printer preferences
Linux
68
231, 233
UNIX
setting the paper size
126
machine information 211, 214, 215, 216,
217,
218, 221
48
preprinted paper
23
reports
card stock
output support
297
R
232
setting as a default machine
print media
scanning problems
273
54
scanning
301
problems
basic information
245
Linux scanning
251
250
copying problems
296
Mac scanning
faxing problems
299
Scanning from image editing program 248,
246,
249
paper feeding problems 282, 283, 284, 288
Index 326
Index
service contact numbers
SetIP program
304
150, 188
Special features
224
specifications
116
print media
118
status
24, 26
supplies
adjusting the width and length
39
changing the tray size
39
system requirements
loading paper in manual
feeder/multi-purpose tray
42
setting the paper size and type
49
U
understanding the status LED
107
available supplies
72
estimated toner cartridge life
75
monitoring the supplies life
84
driver installation for network connected
159
ordering
72
printing
replacing toner cartridge
79
UNIX
system requirements
general information
266
SyncThru™ Web Service
266
toner cartridge
W
handling instructions
74
non-Samsung and refilled
74
redistributing toner
storing
tray
76, 79
74
150, 188
wireless
ad hoc mode
165
Infrastructure mode
165
USB cable
WPS
disconnecting
PBC mode
171, 174
169
169
wireless network
network cable
187
123
driver installation 29, 31, 144, 146, 145, 147
using help
75
using SetIP
121
USB cable
T
estimated life
242
Unix
SyncThru Web Service
driver installation for network connected
153,
29, 31
57, 241
watermark
create
235
delete
236
edit
236
Windows
common Windows problems
301
Index 327
Download PDF